Index of /manuals
2012 Toyota Rav4 owners manual - OwnersMan
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS 2WD 4WD A/C ABS ACC ALR
AUTO LSD AVG CRS DAC DISP ECU EDR ELR EPS
GAWR GCWR GVWR
I/M LATCH
LED MMT M+S MTBE OBD RFT SRS
MEANING 2 Wheel Drive 4 Wheel Drive Air Conditioning Anti-lock Brake System Accessory Automatic Locking Retractor Automatic Limited Slip Differential Average Child Restraint System Downhill Assist Control Display Electronic Control Unit Event Data Recorder Emergency Locking Retractor Electric Power Steering Gross Axle Weight Rating Gross Combination Weight Rating Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Emission Inspection and Maintenance Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Light Emitting Diode Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl Mud and Snow Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether On Board Diagnostics Run-Flat Tire Supplemental Restraint System
548
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS TIN
TPMS TRAC TWR
VIN VSC
MEANING Tire Identification Number Tire Pressure Warning System Traction Control Trailer Weight Rating Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Stability Control
549
For your information
Main Owner's Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products may affect performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
18
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Cruise control system Anti-lock brake system SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Vehicle data recordings
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: · Engine speed · Accelerator status · Brake status · Vehicle speed · Shift position The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures. Data usage Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
· With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
· In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
· For use by Toyota in a law suit · For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
19
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating; · Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened; · How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
20
Disclosure of the EDR data Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: · An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained · In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency · For use by Toyota in a law suit However, if necessary, Toyota may: · Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance · Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
21
CAUTION
General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children's safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
22
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
23
24
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7 For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system Master keys
Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 40)
Valet key Key number plate
Vehicles with smart key system
Electronic keys
· Operating the smart key system (P. 28)
· Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 40)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 489)
26
Before driving
1-1. Key information
When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 340)
Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
1
Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (P. 488)
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
To prevent key damage Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet. Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface. Do not disassemble the key.
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 29) Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 29) Starts the engine (P. 147)
: If equipped
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors and back door (front and back door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
1
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.
Press the lock button to lock the doors.
Before driving
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin Antennas inside the cabin Antenna outside the luggage compartment
30
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors
1
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of either of the outside front door handles and back door handle.
When starting the engine or changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 489)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
When carrying or using the electronic key together with one or move of the following devices that emit radio waves
· Another vehicle's electronic key · A wireless key that emits radio waves · Personal computer If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects is attached to the rear window
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold
or
for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
on the key.
32
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
Mode
Unlocking doors
Beep
1
Hold the driver's door han-
dle to unlock only the
Driver's door
driver's door.
Exterior: Beeps twice
unlocking mode Hold the front passenger's Interior: Pings once
door handle to unlock all
doors
All doors unlocking mode
Hold either front and back door handle to unlock all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice Interior: Pings once
Battery-saving function In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging. When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when... The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock button. The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-
tion. (P. 40) The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 489)
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Electronic key battery depletion The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart key system or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 417) If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (P. 35) To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
· TVs · Personal computers · Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones · Table lamps
To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
Note for the entry function Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
· The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
· The electronic key is on the instrument panel, in the auxiliary box, on the luggage cover (if equipped), on the floor or in the glove box when the engine is started or "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes are changed.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
34
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.
Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door 1 handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again. Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are used to prevent the theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. When any warning lights come on: Take appropriate measures in response to which warning light comes on. (P. 454)
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When an alarm sounds: Take appropriate measures according to the following table.
Alarm
Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds
Exterior alarm sounds once for 60 seconds
Exterior alarm sounds once for 10 seconds Interior alarm sounds continuously
Interior alarm beeps repeatedly
Situation
Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment.
Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open.
Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P.
Switched to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open. (Opened the driver's door when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY mode.)
Turned the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF while the driver's door is open.
Correction procedure Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.
Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and lock the doors again.
Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door.
Close the driver's door.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
Tried to close the driver's
Interior and exterior alarms sound continuously.
door after carrying the key outside the vehicle with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY mode and without the shift lever
Shift the shift lever to P, turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door again.
1
being in P.
The electronic key has a low battery.
Replace the electronic key battery.
Interior alarm beeps once.
Tried to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or when the electronic key was not functioning normally.
Start the engine with the electronic key present.
Interior alarm beeps once and exterior alarm sounds 3 times.
Tried to close the driver's door after carrying the key outside the vehicle without turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
An occupant carried the electronic key outside the vehicle and closed the door when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch was in IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY mode.
Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door again.
Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
If the smart key system does not operate properly Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 489) Starting the engine. (P. 489)
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 417
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer It is possible to deactivate the smart key system etc. (Customizable features P. 528)
Certification for the smart key system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2 FCC ID: HYQ14AEM FCC ID: HYQ13BZS FCC ID: HYQ14ABK FCC ID: HYQ13CZA NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
38
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from smart key system antennas. (P. 30) The radio waves may 1 affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors Pushing and holding: Sounds alarm Unlocks all doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Vehicles with smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Pushing and holding: Sounds alarm
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
40
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Panic mode Vehicles without smart key system
When
is pushed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound for 1 about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights
will flash to deter any person from trying
to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.
Vehicles with smart key system
When
is pushed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound for
about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights
will flash to deter any person from trying
to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.
Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
Key battery depletion
Vehicles without smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 417)
Vehicles with smart key system P. 417
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
If the wireless remote control does not operate Vehicles without smart key system
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (P. 44) Vehicles with smart key system
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 489) Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again. Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without smart key system The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations. Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer Vehicles with smart key system P. 32 Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 528)
42
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key system)
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ12BDC
FCC ID: HYQ13BDC
1
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with smart key system)
P. 38
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system) P. 28
Wireless remote control P. 40
Key Vehicles without smart key system Locks all doors Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Vehicles with smart key system The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 489)
44
Before driving
Door lock switch
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Locks all doors Unlocks all doors
1
Inside lock button
Locks the door Unlocks the door
Pulling the door handle can open the front door even if the lock button is in the lock position.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Locking the front doors from the outside without the wireless remote control or key STEP 1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position. STEP 2 Close the door. Rear door child-protector locks
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the childprotector lock is set.
Unlock Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
46
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When all the doors are locked with the entry function (vehicles with smart key system), wireless remote control or key The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch. The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry 1 function (vehicles with smart key system), wireless remote control or key.
The doors cannot be locked when Vehicles without smart key system
The key is in the engine switch and either front door is open. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 528)
CAUTION
To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. Always use a seat belt. Always lock the doors. Ensure that all doors are properly closed. Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be opened using the back door handle. The back door can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote control, entry function (vehicles with smart key system) or door lock switch.
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system) P. 29
Wireless remote control P. 40
Door lock switch P. 45
Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is intended for rear end protection and easier step-up loading.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 528)
48
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the back door closed while driving. If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug- 1 gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving. Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident. Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. Do not get on the rear step bumper.
Caution while parking If the open back door hides the stop, tail or rear turn signal lights, other road users must be warned of the presence of your vehicle by a warning triangle or other device.
When children are in the vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion. Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
Operating the back door Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury. When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close. Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
The back door may close if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.
When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door. Such additional weight on the back door may interfere with the safety opening and closing operation of the back door.
If the open back door hides the stop, tail, rear side marker or rear turn signal lights while you are parked, other road users must be warned of the presence of your vehicle by a warning triangle or other device.
50
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the back door components Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.
1
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever (driver's side only)
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power seat (driver's side only)
Seat position adjustment switch Seatback angle adjustment 1 switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Seat lumbar support adjustment switch
Before driving
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Flattening front seatbacks
The front seats can be moved into a flat seat arrangement.
Manual seat STEP 1 Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 57) STEP 2 Remove the front head restraint. (P. 68)
STEP 3
Slide the front seat further forward than the front-most lock position.
STEP 4
Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever up to unlock and push down the seatback.
After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power seat STEP 1 Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 57) STEP 2 Remove the front head restraint. (P. 68)
STEP 3
Push the seat position adjusting 1 switch forward to slide the seat
to the front-most position.
Before driving
STEP 4
Active head restraints
Move the seatback angle adjusting switch backward to flatten the seatback.
After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace the head restraint.
When the occupant's lower back presses against the seatback during a rear-end collision, the head restraint moves slightly forward and upward to help reduce the risk of whiplash on the seat occupant.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
Inner structure
During rear-end collision
CAUTION
Seat adjustment Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage. Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
Second seats Vehicles with third seat
Seat position adjustment
levers
1
Seatback angle adjustment
levers
When a person sits in the rear
center position, adjust both
seat cushions to the same
position and align all seat-
backs at the same angle.
Before driving
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Vehicles without third seat
Seat position adjustment levers
Seatback angle adjustment levers
When a person sits in the rear center position, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align all seatbacks at the same angle.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Third seats (if equipped)
The third seats do not have a seat adjustment function.
1
Before driving
Moving a second seats for third seats entry (vehicles with third seats) Getting in the vehicle (right side only)
Pull the lever forward and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.
After passengers are in, lift up the seatback and return the seat to the original position.
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Folding second seats
Folding down the second seats will enlarge the luggage compartment.
Before folding the second seats STEP 1 Stow the second center seat belt. (P. 74)
STEP 2
Make sure the outside seat belt passes through the hanger when folding the second seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged.
STEP 3
Stow the second seat belt buckles.
STEP 4 Remove the outside head restraint (P. 69) STEP 5 Lower the center head restraint to the lowest position.
(P. 68) STEP 6 Raise the armrest until it locks. (P. 357)
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Folding second seats STEP 1 Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 57)
From inside
STEP 2
Pull down the seatback angle 1 adjustment lever and fold down
the seatback.
From outside (vehicles without third seats)
STEP 2
Open the back door and pull the lock release lever to fold down the second seat.
Before driving
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Stowing third seats (vehicles with third seats)
Before stowing the third seats
STEP 1
Stow the third seat belt buckles.
STEP 2
Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged.
STEP 3 Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. (P. 68)
STEP 4
Pull the seatback lock release strap to fold down the seatback.
Make sure it is locked securely.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Stowing third seats
STEP 1
Pull and hold the seat lock
release strap and lift up the seat
rearward and then push the seat
down.
1
STEP 2
Push the seat on the front side against the floor and push the seat on rear side against the floor.
Make sure it is locked securely.
Before driving
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Returning third seats
STEP 1
Pull the seat lock release strap, lift the seat up and move the seat forward. Lock the seat into place.
Make sure it is locked securely.
STEP 2
Pull the seatback lock release strap and raise the seatback.
If the seat does not lift up when the seat lock release strap is pulled, lock the seatback again.
64
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injuries.
1
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
If you recline the seatback more than necessary, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.
Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly push up the seat position adjustment lever and the seat may suddenly move, causing the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align all seatbacks at the same angle when a person sits in the rear center position.
Otherwise, the person cannot wear the seat belt properly and this may cause death or serious injuries in a collision.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
When folding second seats Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Do not fold the second seatback when passengers sit or luggage is placed on the seat. Do not allow passengers to ride on the folded seat or in the luggage compartment while driving. Make sure that no passengers or luggage are on the rear seats. Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
When stowing third seats Make sure that no passenger or luggage are on the seats. Then, hold the seat and slowly move it. Otherwise, people may be injured or luggage may be damaged if the seat hits them. Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly. Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position ready for use. Do not stow or return the seats when you are inside the vehicle in order to prevent pinching your hands or feet in the seat. Be sure to stow and return the seats from outside the vehicle.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
After adjusting a seat
After adjusting the seat position, try sliding it forward and backward to
make sure it is locked in position.
1
After adjusting the seatback, push your body adjust the seatback to make sure it is locked in position.
Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position and are ready for use.
NOTICE
Before folding the seats To prevent damage to the seat belt buckles, stow them before folding the seatback.
Before driving
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Lock release button
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Second seats
Lock release buttons
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Third seats (if equipped)
Lock release button
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
68
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Removing the head restraints
Front seats
Pull the head restraint up while pushing 1 the lock release button.
Second seats
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
Third seats (if equipped)
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.
Second seats
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.
Third seats (if equipped)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.
70
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
1
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints (except second outside head restraints) Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fastening the belt
Release button
Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
72
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats) Down Up
1
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.
Second center seat belt The second center seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation.
Make sure that the buckle is securely latched ready for use of the center seat belt.
Tab "A" Tab "B"
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Releasing method The second center seat belt can be completely released only when necessary such as when folding down the second seats.
STEP 1
To release the tab "A", insert the tab "B", key (vehicles without a smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system) (P. 26) into the hole on the buckle.
Retract the belt slowly when releasing and stowing the seat belt.
STEP 2
Stow the seat belt tabs in the cover located on the roof as shown.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.
74
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
1
Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 125)
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 72)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
When not using the outer rear seat belts Second seats Pass the outer rear seat belts through the seat belt hangers and secure the seat belt plates to prevent the shoulder belts from being damaged.
Third seats
Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers to prevent the shoulder belts from being damaged.
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 121)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 72 regarding seat belt usage.
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota 1
dealer free of charge.
Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. Always wear a seat belt properly. Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children. Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-
ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
77
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 73)
Seat belt pretensioners Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision. If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.
Seat belt damage and wear Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage. Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.
78
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
When using the second center seat belt Do not use the second center seat belt 1 with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.
Using a seat belt extender Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP 1
Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.
STEP 2
Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
80
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
1
Normal position Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned ON. Vehicles without smart key system: The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system: The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror) To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
82
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Vehicles without smart key system
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
1
Vehicles with smart key system
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 1
Select a mirror to adjust. Left Right
STEP 2
Adjust the mirror.
Up Right Down Left
83
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Folding back the mirrors
Push backward to fold the mirrors.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 258)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
84
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.
Closing
1
One-touch closing (driver's
window only)*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver's
window only)*
*: Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
85
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Operating the power windows after turning the engine off (front win-
dows only) Vehicles without smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with smart key system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. Jam protection function (driver's window only) If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. When the battery is disconnected The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. (Initialize each window with the respective switches.) STEP 1 Open the window fully. STEP 2 Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and holding it for 1
second.
86
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
When the power window does not close normally If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the driver's door. Vehicles without smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the win- 1 dow can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure. STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed. STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely. STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed. If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
87
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
Jam protection function (driver's window only) Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
88
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.
Opening and closing
1
Open
The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise. Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.
Press either side of the switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Close
Tilting up and down
Press either side of the switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt up
Press either side of the switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt down
Press either side of the switch to stop the moon roof partway.
The moon roof can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
: If equipped
89
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off Vehicles without smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with smart key system The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. If the moon roof cannot be closed If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically, such as when the jam protection function activates accidentally due to a malfunction, press and hold the "TILT UP" side of the switch until the moon roof slide closed completely. To reduce moon roof wind noise When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help reduce wind noise. Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. Opening the moon roof by small degrees Quickly press and release the switch. When the battery is disconnected The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. Press and hold the "TILT UP" side of the switch until the moon roof tilts up completely.
90
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
1
STEP 2 Press and hold the "TILT UP" switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. STEP 2 Press and hold the "TILT UP" switch*1 until the moon roof moves
into the tilt up position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the "TILT UP" switch once and then press and hold the "TILT UP" switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
*1:If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2:If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the "TILT UP" switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
91
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Jam protection function Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.
92
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without smart key system Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position and ensure that 1 all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles with smart key system Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
Opening the fuel tank cap
STEP 1
Pull up the fuel filler door opener.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.
93
1-5. Refueling STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction.
Fuel types Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)
Fuel tank capacity Approximately 15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp. gal.)
94
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
1
Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
95
1-5. Refueling
NOTICE
Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.
96
Before driving
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
1
Vehicles without smart key system: The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.
Vehicles with smart key system: The indicator light flashes after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.
97
1-6. Theft deterrent system
System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction If the key is in contact with a metallic object If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
Certifications for the engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Vehicles without smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY
Vehicles with smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
98
1-6. Theft deterrent system
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
1
Before driving
99
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.
100
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 52)
1
Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 52) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 80) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 68) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 72)
101
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
While driving Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
102
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
1
Before driving
Front airbags Driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Side and curtain shield airbags Side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. Curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats.
103
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Curtain shield airbags Side airbags Front passenger airbag Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Front airbag sensors Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch Curtain shield airbag sensors "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light Driver airbag Driver's seat position sensor Driver's seat belt buckle switch Airbag sensor assembly Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors) Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
104
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and 1 occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 455)
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. The windshield may crack.
105
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag deployment conditions Front airbags
The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle "underrides", or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 115) Side airbags and curtain shield airbags
The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]) or vehicle rollover.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 115)
The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.
106
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
1
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration.
The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal. The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS front airbags The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. Collision from the side Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover
107
1-7. Safety information
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.
Collision from the front Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
Collision from the front Collision from the rear Pitching end over end
108
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
When to contact your Toyota dealer In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. The front of the vehicle is damaged or 1 deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
109
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration ("NHTSA") advises: Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: · Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. · Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. · If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
110
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions If the seat belt extender has been con- 1 nected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (P. 121)
111
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
112
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not attach anything to or lean any- 1 thing against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy.
Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars or roof side rail garnish.
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (P. 104). Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
113
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags. Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rail. Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment. Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or a kangaroo bar etc.). Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system. Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players. Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
114
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
1
SRS warning light Front passenger's seat belt reminder light "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light "AIR BAG ON" indicator light
115
1-7. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
Adult*1
Indicator/ warning light
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Devices
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
Child*3 or child restraint system*4
"AIR BAG ON" Off
Flashing*2
Activated
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
"AIR BAG OFF"*5 Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
116
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Unoccupied
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF"
Not illumi-
indicator lights
nated
Indicator/ warning light
SRS warning light
1
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
Off
light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Deactivated Activated
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/ warning light
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
"AIR BAG OFF" On
Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
117
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 122)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 125)
118
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant clas-
sification system.
1
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger's seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the second seat.
Do not let a passenger in the second seat lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a second seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the second seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the second seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
119
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the second seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 125) Do not modify or remove the front seats. Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front seatbacks. Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
120
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
1
use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 125)
121
1-7. Safety information
Types of child restraint Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
122
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear 1 seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 72)
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
123
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
124
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a
child restraint.
1
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Second outside seats: Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the rear outside seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver's seat belt)
125
1-7. Safety information
Second outside seats: Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for the second outside seats.
Second center seat: Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for the second center seat.
126
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system (second outside seats only)
STEP 1
Type A
STEP 2
Canada only
Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback
1
and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position). Adjust the seatback to the 7th lock position. (P. 57)
1st lock position 7th lock position
Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.
The bars are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
127
1-7. Safety information
Type B
STEP 2
Canada only
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.
The bars are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
128
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehi- 1 cle.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
129
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
Forward facing Convertible seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2 STEP 3 130
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
1
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
STEP 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 132)
Booster seat
STEP 1
Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
Before driving
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 72)
131
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (second seats only)
Outside seats
STEP 1
Remove the head restraint.
STEP 2
Slide the seats forward slightly if it is in the rear-most position.
132
Before driving
STEP 3 Front of vehicle STEP 4
1-7. Safety information
Secure the child restraint using the seat belt. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
1
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
Replace the head restraint.
STEP 5
Move the seats to the rear-most lock position.
133
1-7. Safety information
Center seat
Open the anchor bracket cover. Secure the child restraint using the seat belt. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
134
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode. (P. 75)
1
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
Adjust the front passenger seat or second seats so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
135
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far back as possible (second seat only), with the seatback close to the child restraint system. When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure. After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
136
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
Starting the engine P. 147, 151
Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 154)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 159)
STEP 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N.
(P. 154)
Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 159)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 154)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
STEP 4 Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with smart key system: Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
138
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1 Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. STEP 2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal. STEP 3 Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the 2 windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Engine speed while driving In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill When the accelerator pedal is released
Breaking in your new Toyota To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. For the first 500 miles (800 km): Do not tow a trailer. For the first 1000 miles (1600 km): · Do not drive at extremely high speeds. · Avoid sudden acceleration. · Do not drive continuously in the low gears. · Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding-down.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 506)
CAUTION
When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
When driving the vehicle Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. · Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. · When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. · Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. · Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby. Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
140
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle 2 control.
Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 498
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 155)
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle off-road. This vehicle is not designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water. This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
When driving on slippery road surfaces Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
When the vehicle is stopped Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
142
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
2
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following.
· Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
· The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
· Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
143
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
When braking the vehicle When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase. Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
144
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (4WD models)
2
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or
stuck in sand or mud etc. This may damage the drive system components or
propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
145
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. It may be difficult to control your vehicle. The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. The vehicle will behave abnormally. Replace the flat tire with a new one. (P. 472)
When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. Engine stalling Short in electrical components Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following. Brake function Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle, transfer (4WD models), rear differential (4WD models), etc. Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (4WD models), bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
146
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started in any mode by operating the "ENGINE START STOP" switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal.
2
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver's seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns green. If the indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
STEP 4
Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode Modes can be changed by pressing the "ENGINE START STOP" switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) OFF*
The emergency flashers can be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns amber. *: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to OFF.
148
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Steering lock release Make sure that the steering wheel lock is released. To release the steering wheel lock, gently turn the wheel left or right while pressing the "ENGINE START STOP" switch. When the steering wheel lock does not release, the "ENGINE START STOP" 2 switch indicator will flash green.
If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 97)
When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator flashes in amber The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch will automatically turn OFF.
Electronic key battery depletion P. 34
When the electronic key battery is discharged P. 418
Conditions affecting operation P. 32
Note for the entry function P. 34
149
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Stopping the engine in an emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the "ENGINE START STOP" switch for more than 3 seconds. However, do not touch the "ENGINE START STOP" switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
When starting the engine Do not race a cold engine. If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
150
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)
Starting the engine STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 3 Sit in the driver's seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. STEP 4 Turn the engine switch to the "START" position to start the
engine.
Engine (ignition) switch
2
"LOCK"
The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)
"ACC"
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.
"ON"
All electrical components can be used.
"START"
For starting the engine.
When driving
151
2-1. Driving procedures
Turning the key from "ACC" to "LOCK"
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 154)
STEP 2 Push in the key and turn to the "LOCK" position.
Steering lock release
When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the "LOCK" position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction.
If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 97)
Key reminder function A buzzer sounds if the driver's door is opened, while the engine switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving Do not turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to the "ACC" position.
152
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the "ACC" or "ON" position for a long period if the engine is not running.
When starting the engine
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the
starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
2
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
When driving
153
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever 4-speed models
5-speed models
154
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Vehicles without smart key system: While the engine switch is in the "ON" position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles with smart key system: While the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift
lever.
Shift position uses
2
Shift position
Function
4-speed models
5-speed models
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*
4
Position for engine braking
3,2
Position for more powerful engine braking
L
Position for maximum engine braking
*: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable
for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.
155
2-1. Driving procedures
Downshifting restrictions The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded. 4-speed models (2WD) mph (km/h)
Downshifting 3 2 2 L
Maximum speed 75 (121) 37 (60)
4-speed models (4WD)
mph (km/h)
Downshifting 3 2 2 L
Maximum speed 72 (117) 36 (58)
5-speed models
mph (km/h)
Downshifting 4 3 3 2 2 L
Maximum speed 100 (161) 62 (99) 26 (42)
156
2-1. Driving procedures
When driving with cruise control activated
4-speed models
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to 3 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 182)
5-speed models
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to 4
because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 182)
2
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 487
When driving
157
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn Left turn Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
Turn signals can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
158
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Canada U.S.A.
2
Sets the parking brake
Fully apply the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.
Usage in winter time See "Winter driving tips" for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 220)
NOTICE
Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P. 80)
160
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
Vehicles without smart key system The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
161
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information display
P. 167
Automatic transmission shift position indicator lights
P. 154
Odometer/trip meter Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter Darker When the headlight switch is turned on, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the control dial is turned fully up.
162
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 494)
2
163
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.
Instrument cluster
Center panel
164
2-2. Instrument cluster
When driving
Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.
Turn signal indicator (P. 158)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator (P. 170)
Headlight high beam
Tail light indicator
indicator (P. 172)
(P. 170)
2
(Canada)
*1
(if equipped)
Downhill assist control system indicator (P. 203)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 174)
(if equipped)
*1, 2 Slip indicator
(P. 195)
*1
"AUTO LSD" indicator (P. 196)
(2WD models)
*1
Four-wheel drive lock indicator (P. 206)
(4WD models)
*1 "AIR BAG ON"
and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator (P. 115)
*1 VSC OFF indicator
(P. 196)
Cruise control indicator (P. 182)
Engine immobilizer system indicator (P. 97)
*1
"TRAC OFF" indicator (P. 197)
(4WD models)
*1: These lights turn on when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.
165
2-2. Instrument cluster
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems. (P. 454)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
(Canada) (U.S.A.)
(Canada) (U.S.A.)
*1
*1
*1
*2
*1
(Canada)
*1
(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.)
(if equipped)
*1
(if equipped)
(if equipped)(4WD models)
*1: These lights turn on when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.
166
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information display
The trip information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, including the current outside temperature.
Trip information (P. 168)
Displays outside temperature and fuel consumption.
2
167
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
Without Display Audio system
Push the "DISP" button to display trip information.
Display items can be switched by pressing the "DISP" button.
With Display Audio system
Push the "DISP" button to display trip information.
Display items can be switched by pressing the "DISP" button.
Outside temperature Indicates the outside temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). If the outside temperature falls below 37°F (3°C) while driving, the temperature display will flash a few times to inform the driver of the need for caution due to ice on the road resulting from the low temperature.
Instantaneous fuel consumption Displays the instantaneous fuel consumption.
168
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
· To reset the calculations, return the mode to "AVG" and push and hold the "DISP" button until the display shows "0".
· Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
2
Display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
169
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
Vehicles with daytime running light system: The daytime running lights turn on.
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
The
headlights,
(if equipped) parking lights and
daytime running
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the "ENGINE
START
STOP"
switch or the engine
switch is in ON)
170
When driving
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Vehicles with daytime running light system: The daytime running lights turn on.
The side marker, parking, tail, license 2 plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
The
headlights,
(if equipped) parking lights and
daytime running
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the "ENGINE
START
STOP"
switch or the engine
switch is in ON)
171
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
Daytime running light system (if equipped) To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
Headlight control sensor (with automatic light control system) The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
172
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Automatic light off system
Vehicles without smart key system:
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after driver's door is opened and closed if the engine switch has been turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position. To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the "ON" position, or
turn the headlight switch off and then back to
or
.
Vehicles with smart key system:
2
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after driver's door is opened and closed if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. To turn the lights on again, turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the headlight switch off and then back to
or
.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be deactivated. (Customizable features P. 528)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
When driving
173
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Type A Off Front fog lights on
: If equipped
174
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Off Front fog lights on
2
When driving
175
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Type A Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
176
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Wash/wipe operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
2
Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation
When driving
177
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
Wash/wipe operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
178
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.
When a nozzle is blocked
2
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
When driving
179
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
Type A
Intermittent window wiper operation
Normal
window
wiper operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
180
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Intermittent window wiper operation
Normal
window
wiper operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
2
Washer/wiper dual operation
When driving
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
When the rear window is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
When a nozzle is blocked Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
181
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Indicator Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.
182
2-4. Using other driving systems
When driving
Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
Increase the speed Decrease the speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
2
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
183
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control can be set when The shift lever is in D or 3 (4-speed models), or D or 4 (5-speed models). Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
Coast braking function Holding the lever down to decrease the set speed activates the brake system automatically, decelerating the vehicle quickly. While the brake system is operating, the stop lights and high mounted stoplight will turn on. A sound may be heard from the engine compartment during the operation of the brake system. The sound means the brake system is operating and it does not indicate a malfunction.
Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). VSC is activated.
If the cruise control indicator light flashes Press the "ON-OFF" button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
184
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the "ON-OFF" button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
2
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
When driving
185
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.
The rear view image is displayed on the inside rear view mirror.
The screen turns off in the following situations: · The shift lever is shifted out
of R. · The back door is opened. · The screen remains on for
approximately 5 minutes.
186
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
The rear view monitor system can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The shift lever is in R, the back door is fully closed and the engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with smart key system The shift lever is in R, the back door is fully closed and the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
2
Changing display modes The rear view monitor display mode can be changed while the screen is on. To temporarily disable the rear view monitor system Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator will turn amber. Vehicles without smart key system The system will be re-enabled once the engine switch is turned OFF and then turned to the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system The system will be re-enabled once the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF and then turned to IGNITION ON mode.
187
2-4. Using other driving systems
To constantly disable the rear view monitor system
Push and hold the "AUTO" button for 12 to 15 seconds. The screen will turn off and on after 6 seconds. Keep pushing the button until the screen turns back off. The indicator will flash amber.
Vehicles without smart key system The system will not automatically turn on again after the engine switch is OFF and then turned to the "ON" position.
Vehicles with smart key system The system will not automatically turn on again after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is OFF and then turned to IGNITION ON mode. To re-enable the rear view monitor system Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator will turn green. Selecting a language (English, French or Spanish)
STEP 1 Push and hold the "AUTO" button for 6 to 12 seconds. The screen will turn on and the indicator will turn green.
STEP 2 Push the "AUTO" button. Each time the "AUTO" button is pushed and released, the language changes. A message will flash in the mirror for 5 seconds after the button is released, indicating that the change has been completed.
188
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Displayed area Vehicles without spare tire
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
2
Corners of bumper
Vehicles with spare tire
Spare tire Corners of bumper
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
The area displayed on the screen is reduced because the spare tire partially blocks the field of view of the camera. Also, the rear mounted spare tire extends past the rear bumper.
189
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system camera Vehicles without spare tire In the following cases, it may become difficult to see images on the screen even if the system functions correctly. The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night. The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low. Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains. Foreign matter, such as snow or mud, adheres to the camera lens. The camera lens is scratched or has dirt on it. The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens. A bright object such as a white wall is reflected in the mirror surface over the screen.
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
Vehicles with spare tire
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see images on the screen even if the system functions correctly.
The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.
The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.
2
Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains.
Foreign matter, such as snow or mud, adheres to the camera lens.
The camera lens is scratched or has dirt on it.
The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.
A bright object such as a white wall is reflected in the mirror surface over the screen.
When driving
191
2-4. Using other driving systems
Smear effect If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* characteristic to the camera may occur. *: Smear effect: A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.
Flicker effect When the camera is used under fluorescent light, sodium lights, or mercury lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
When using the rear view monitor system Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries. The rear view monitor system is a supplement device intended to assist back up. Never depend solely on the rear view monitor system when reversing. Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear. Use caution just as you would when backing up any vehicle. The camera has a special lens. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances. Vehicles with spare tire: The spare tire is the rear-most edge of the vehicle extending past the rear bumper. Take care not to hit any obstacles with the spare tire while reversing.
192
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera's position and mounting angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. When the outside temperature is low, the displayed image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely visible. Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the 2 vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally. If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse. When replacing tires, please consult your Toyota dealer. If you replace the tires, the area displayed on the screen may change.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the camera As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in camera malfunctions. Take care so that organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat does not adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
193
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.
TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
AUTO LSD function (2WD models)
The AUTO LSD function is activated when the system is in TRAC off mode. It operates when one of the drive wheels is spinning, such as when the wheel is spinning freely on ice or mud. The system applies the brakes to the spinning wheel and transfers some of the torque to the other wheel to secure drive power.
Active Torque Control 4WD system (4WD models)
Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to four-wheel drive (4WD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to 4WD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.
194
2-4. Using other driving systems
Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surface by controlling steering performance.
Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
P. 201
Downhill assist control system (if equipped)
P. 203
2
When the VSC/TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or if any of the drive wheels spins, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/ TRAC systems are operating.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.
When driving
195
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or VSC (2WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. The AUTO LSD function is activated when the system is in TRAC off mode.
Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the switch to turn off TRAC.
Turning off TRAC and VSC
The "AUTO LSD" and VSC OFF indicator lights should come on.
While the AUTO LSD function is operating the slip indicator light flashes.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
Push and hold the switch while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and VSC.
The VSC OFF indicator light should come on.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
196
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or VSC (4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
2
The "TRAC OFF" indicator light should come on.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the switch while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and VSC.
The "TRAC OFF" and VSC OFF indicator lights should come on.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
When driving
197
2-4. Using other driving systems
Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC Vehicles without smart key system
Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
Vehicles with smart key system Turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them. Automatic TRAC reactivation
2WD models If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will be reactivated while vehicle speed is increased.
4WD models If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases. When the "AUTO LSD" indicator light flashes even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed (2WD models) TRAC, AUTO LSD, hill-start assist control and downhill assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer. When the "TRAC OFF" indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed (4WD models) TRAC, hill-start assist control and downhill assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer. Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC and VSC A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
198
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. · Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. · A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. · The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated. · The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
When the AUTO LSD function operates continuously The brake actuator may overheat. In that case, the system will stop the AUTO LSD function, a buzzer will sound and the slip indicator will stay on 2 steady. Refrain from using the AUTO LSD function until the slip indicator goes off. (There is no problem with continuing driving normally.)
EPS operation sound When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Reduced effectiveness of EPS system The effectiveness of EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
If the slip indicator comes on It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC, TRAC and AUTO LSD function. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
The ABS does not operate effectively when Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick road.
199
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations. When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads When driving with tire chains When driving over bumps in the road When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
When the VSC is activated The slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
When TRAC and VSC are off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level. The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
200
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
2
indicate the system is acti-
vated. The slip indicator will
also start flashing.
Hill-start assist control operating conditions
· The shift lever is in a position other than P. · The parking brake is not applied. · The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
Hill-start assist control
While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted stoplight turn on.
Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.
If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above have been met.
: If equipped
201
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control buzzer When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once when the shift lever is in a position other than R. In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the buzzer will sound twice when the shift lever is in a position other than R. · No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of releasing the brake pedal. · The shift lever is moved to P. · The parking brake is applied. · The brake pedal is depressed again. When the shift lever is in R, the buzzer indicating the start and end of the operation does not sound. Use the slip indicator status (flashing or off) to confirm if hill-start assist control is operating.
If the slip indicator comes on It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Hill-start assist control Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice. Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as doing so may lead to an accident.
202
2-4. Using other driving systems
Downhill assist control system
With the downhill assist control system, the vehicle is able to descend a steep hill while maintaining a constant low speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) without brake pedal operation.
Activating the downhill assist control system Press the "DAC" switch.
The downhill assist control sys-
tem indicator will come on to
2
indicate that the downhill assist
control system is activated.
Pressing the switch again turns the system off.
While the downhill assist control system is operating
The slip indicator will flash to indicate that the downhill assist control system is operating, and the stop lights and high mounted stoplight will turn on.
When driving
: If equipped
203
2-4. Using other driving systems
Conditions in which the downhill assist control system does not operate or will stop operating In the following situations, the downhill assist control system indicator flashes and the downhill assist control system does not operate or will stop operating: · The shift lever is not in L or R. · The vehicle speed is higher than 15 mph (25 km/h). If the accelerate or brake pedal is depressed, the downhill assist control system will stop operating with the downhill assist control system indicator stayed on.
If the "DAC" switch is turned off while the downhill assist control system is operating The downhill assist control system gradually ceases operation. The downhill assist control system indicator will flash during the canceling operation, and then go off when the system is fully off.
Downhill assist control system operation sound A sound may be heard from the engine compartment while the downhill assist control system is operating. This sound does not indicate a malfunction. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the downhill assist control system is operating, a sound caused by the release of system operation may be heard, or you may feel the brake pedal push-back. This does not indicate a malfunction.
When the downhill assist control system operates continuously The brake actuator may overheat. In that case, the downhill assist control system will stop operating, a buzzer will sound and the downhill assist control system indicator will start flashing. Refrain from using the system until the downhill assist control system indicator stays on. (There is no problem with continuing driving normally.)
If the slip indicator comes on It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
Conditions which may affect the downhill assist control system operation
Do not rely too heavily on the downhill assist control system. On extremely
steep inclines, icy surfaces or muddy roads, the vehicle may slip and the
system may not be able to maintain the constant low vehicle speed of
about 3 mph (5 km/h), leading to an accident causing death or serious
injury.
2
Do not shift the shift lever to R while driving forward, or to D while driving
backward. Doing so may cause the wheels to lock up, leading to an acci-
dent causing death or serious injury. In addition, excessive stress will be
applied to the automatic transmission, possibly resulting in damage.
When driving
205
2-4. Using other driving systems
Four-wheel drive lock switch (4WD models)
Four-wheel drive lock mode can be used when a large amount of drive power needs to be applied to all the wheels, such as when the vehicle gets stuck in mud and you need to free it.
Press the switch.
The torque of the engine is distributed to the rear wheels to the maximum extent possible in accordance with driving conditions. Pressing the switch again cancels four-wheel drive lock mode and returns the Active Torque Control 4WD system to normal mode. (P. 194)
Four-wheel drive lock mode can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Four-wheel drive lock mode
Four-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the brakes are applied to ensure the ABS and VSC systems operate effectively.
Four-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h).
206
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle feature Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity 2
than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
207
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Off-road vehicle precautions Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly. Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control. Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
208
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Off-road driving When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles. Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permit-
ted to travel. Respect private property. Get owner's permission before entering 2
private property. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
Additional information for off-road driving For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations. State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments State Motor Vehicle Bureau Recreational Vehicle Clubs U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
209
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Off-road driving precautions Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places. Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow. After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur. When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
To prevent the water damage Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur. Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage. Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage. Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil's lubricating qualities.
210
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.
Inspection after off-road driving
Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect brak-
ing efficiency and may damage brake system components.
2
Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".
When driving
211
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
Roof rails Cross rails
Adjusting the cross rail positions
STEP 1
Turn the knobs counterclockwise to release the cross rails.
212
When driving
2-5. Driving information
STEP 2
Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading luggage and turn the knobs clockwise to tighten the cross rails securely.
2
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
213
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: Without third seat Total load capacity: 825 lb. (375 kg) 825 lb. - 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375 kg - 166 kg = 209 kg) With third seat Total load capacity: 1155 lb. (525 kg) 1155 lb. - 366 lb. = 789 lb. (525 kg - 166 kg = 359 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows: Without third seat 459 lb. - 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209 kg - 176 kg = 33 kg) With third seat 789 lb. - 388 lb. = 401 lb. (359 kg - 176 kg = 183 kg)
214
2-5. Driving information
When driving
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
CAUTION
2
Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver's vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
· Driver's feet · Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) · Luggage cover · Instrument panel · Dashboard · Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
215
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Capacity and distribution Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
Roof luggage carrier precautions When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following: Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles. If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (P. 502) Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier. Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Do not exceed 102.6 lb. (46.2 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
Cross rail adjustment Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
216
When driving
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE When loading luggage (vehicles with moon roof)
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
2
217
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Total load capacity: Without third seat
825 lb. (375 kg) With third seat
1155 lb. (525 kg) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Seating capacity: Without third seat
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) With third seat
7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 5) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. Trailer Weight Rating 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine: 1500 lb. (680 kg) 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine: Without towing package
2000 lb. (905 kg) With towing package
3500 lb. (1585 kg) Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow. Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 408)
218
When driving
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
2
219
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. · Engine oil · Engine coolant · Washer fluid Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
Before driving the vehicle Observe the following according to the driving conditions. Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
220
When driving
2-5. Driving information
When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
2
inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Selecting tire chains Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length Cross chain 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of snow chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. Install the chains on the front tires. Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
221
2-5. Driving information
Tire chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains. Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. Install tire chains on the front tires. Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying manual.
CAUTION
Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. Use tires of the specified size. Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
Driving with tire chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
222
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
Vehicles with a tire pressure warning system:
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Fitting tire chains
2
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
When driving
223
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits. Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped). To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
224
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Towing related terms GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on 2 the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer). GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.
225
2-5. Driving information
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Front GAWR
The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).
Rear GAWR
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (With brakes)
The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, towing package (if available), hitch and hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a trailer with 2 or more axles.
226
2-5. Driving information
Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
(Without brakes)
The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.
Tongue Weight
2
The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. (P. 230)
When driving
227
2-5. Driving information
Weight limits The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in
the table. (P. 229) The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table. (P. 229) The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label. The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.
If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.
If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.
228
2-5. Driving information
GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
GCWR*1 and TWR*1
Engine
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE)
engine*2
Driving system 2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
GCWR
Trailer Weight
Rating
2
5350 lb. (2425kg) 5490 lb. (2490kg)
1500 lb. (680kg)
5990 lb. (2715kg) 6130 lb. (2780kg)
2000 lb. (905kg)
7510 lb. (3405kg) 7650 lb. (3470kg)
3500 lb. (1585kg)
Unbraked TWR*1
1000 lb. (450 kg)
*1: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE Inter-
national per SAE J2807.
*2: With towing package
When driving
229
2-5. Driving information
Trailer Tongue Weight A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types
of trailers or towing as described below. To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must
be loaded by referring to the following instructions. · Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection. If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same height as before connection. The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
230
2-5. Driving information
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight require-
ment of your vehicle.
2
Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
When driving
231
2-5. Driving information
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.
Trailer class
Typical trailer ball size
IV
2 5/16 in.
II and III
2 in.
I
1 7/8 in.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2 threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
232
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball Weight carrying ball position: 41.4 in. (1051.1 mm) Hitch receiver pin hole position: 32.4 in. (821.8 mm)
2
Connecting trailer lights Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle's lights. Please take care to comply with your state's laws when installing trailer lights.
233
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.
Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicletrailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.
Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
234
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turn.
Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.
Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery
surfaces, etc.
2
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D.
Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 494)
235
2-5. Driving information
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and the trailer's wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:
STEP 1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied. STEP 2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's
and trailer's wheels. STEP 3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load. STEP 4 Apply the parking brake firmly. STEP 5 Shift into P and turn off the engine. When restarting after parking on a slope: STEP 1 With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep
the brake pedal pressed. STEP 2 Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R. STEP 3 Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes. STEP 4 Have someone retrieve the blocks.
236
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
2
Coupler Trailer ball
Before towing Check that the following conditions are met: Ensure that your vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (P. 512) Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation. All trailer lights work as required by law. All lights work each time you connect them. The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer. The trailer is level when it is hitched. Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes. The trailer cargo is securely loaded. The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
237
2-5. Driving information
Break-in schedule If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km). After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
Maintenance If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".) Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
If trailer sway occurs One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability. If trailer swaying occurs: · Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead. Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel. · Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize.
238
2-5. Driving information
When driving
After the trailer swaying has stopped:
· Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
· Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
· Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
· Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred
is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
2
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
CAUTION
Trailer towing precautions To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.
To avoid accident or injury Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR. If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required. Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible. Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability. Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
239
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
Do not use cruise control when towing. Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades. Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency. Hitch Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
240
When driving
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
When towing a trailer Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi- 2 cle's braking effectiveness. Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
When installing a trailer hitch Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
Do not directly splice trailer lights Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.
241
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.
CTN25AN019
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD system (4WD models)
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
CTN25AN020
4WD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD system.
CTN25AN021
242
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
Air outlet selection dial Temperature control dial
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Air conditioning on/off switch
Fan speed control dial
Adjusting the settings
Adjusting the temperature setting Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.
Adjusting the fan speed Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Set the dial to "0" to turn the fan off.
: If equipped
244
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Changing the air outlets Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can be also selected for more detailed adjustment.
Air flows to the upper body.
3
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
: Vehicles with third seats
Air flows mainly to the feet.
Interior features
: Vehicles with third seats
245
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
: Vehicles with third seats
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the dial is set at this position.
Pressing
to turn the air
conditioning on clears the windshield and side windows faster.
Air flows to the windshield and side windows.
The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the dial is set at this position.
Pressing
to turn the air
conditioning on clears the windshield and side windows faster.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time
is pressed.
246
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Front outlets (right and left sides)
3
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Opening and closing the side outlets
Open the vent. Close the vent.
Interior features
247
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically be switched to outside air mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is pressed.
When the indicator light on
flashes
Press
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light keeps flashing. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer.
When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature setting.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring: It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to
during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
248
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
3
249
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Driver's side temperature control
Changes the air outlets used
Outside air or
Air flow display
recirculated air mode
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Automatic mode Off Windshield defogger
Fan speed
Passenger's side temperature control Micro dust and pollen filter
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1 Press
.
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2 Press "" on
to increase the temperature and "" to
decrease the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be set separately depending on the temperature setting.
: If equipped
250
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings Adjusting the temperature setting
Press "" on
to increase the temperature and "" to
decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off): Only
3
(driver's
side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
Individual mode (the indicator on is on): The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control starts individual mode.
Adjusting the fan speed
Press "" (increase) or "" (decrease) on
.
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press
to turn the fan off.
Interior features
251
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Changing the air outlets
Press the desired button,
,
,
or
.
The air flow shown on the display indicates the following.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
: Vehicles with third seats
Air flows mainly to the feet.
: Vehicles with third seats
252
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
Interior features
: Vehicles with third seats Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
3
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time
is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
Air flows to the windshield and side windows.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is on.
253
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press .
Outside air mode will be switched to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
254
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front outlets (right and left sides) Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Opening and closing the side outlets
Open the vent.
3
Close the vent.
Interior features
Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. In addition, the following may occur.
Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.
255
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
When outside temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature setting.
Micro dust and pollen filter
In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur.
· Outside air mode is not switched to recirculated air mode.
· The air conditioning system operates automatically.
· The operation is canceled after 1 minute.
In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
When the indicator light on
flashes
Press
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light keep flashing. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
· It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
· The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
256
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
3
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
Interior features
257
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out-
side rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or
raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
*: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
258
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
The defogger can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view
mirror defoggers) Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.
CAUTION
3
Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch them to prevent from burning yourself.
Interior features
259
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
On/off
The de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
The de-icer can be operated when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
When the windshield wiper de-icer is on Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
: If equipped
260
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Without Display Audio system CD player and AM/FM radio
Interior features
3
Title Using the radio Using the CD player Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Operating an iPod Operating a USB memory Optimal use of the audio system Using the AUX port Using the steering wheel audio switches Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone
Page P. 270 P. 273 P. 278 P. 284 P. 292 P. 300 P. 303 P. 304 P. 310
261
3-2. Using the audio system
With Display Audio system Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".
Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are owned by various different owners.
262
3-2. Using the audio system Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (with Display Audio system)
Interior features
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS® and SRS TruBass® audio enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
3
TruBass® enhances the perception of bass frequencies to provide deep, rich
bass response from any size speaker.
SRS FOCUS® raises the audio image from non-optimally placed speakers
up to the natural listening height at ear level.
CAUTION
U.S.A. (without Display Audio system)
FCC ID: ACJ932PTA184
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
263
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Laser products · Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. · This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. · The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.
Canada (without Display Audio system) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
264
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the 3 radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). U.S.A. (with Display Audio system) FCC ID: AJDK032 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device. The antenna for Bluetooth cannot be removed (or replaced) by user. This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
265
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
FCC Warning: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
266
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Canada (with Display Audio system) IC ID: 775E-K032
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et
CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence.
3
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
The antenna for Bluetooth cannot be removed (or replaced) by user.
L'antenne de Bluetooth ne peut pas être supprimé (ou remplacé) par l'utilisateur.
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d'Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l'appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
Interior features
267
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
FCC Warning: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
268
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
3
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
269
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Power Volume
Station selector
Adjusting the frequency or selecting items
Seeking the frequency
Scanning for
AM/FM mode
receivable stations button
Displays text message
Setting station presets
STEP 1 Search for desired stations by turning
or pressing ""
or "" on
.
STEP 2 Press and hold the button (from hear a beep.
to
) until you
270
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning radio stations
Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press again.
once
Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press again.
once 3
Switching the display
Press
.
If the text continues past the end of the display, " .
" is displayed. Press
Reception sensitivity
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.
The radio antenna is mounted on the rear roof. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it.
Interior features
271
3-2. Using the audio system
Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna. Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
NOTICE
To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases. The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage. A cover will be put on the roof.
272
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Power Volume
CD eject
Random playback
Reverse Repeat play
Selecting a track or displays track list
Interior features
Selecting a track Search playback
Fast-forward 3
Playback Displays text message
Loading CDs Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press
and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Turn
or press "" to move up or "" to move down using
until the desired track number is displayed.
273
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press
( ) or
Selecting a track from a track list
( ).
STEP 1 Press
.
The track list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
Scanning tracks
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2 Press
again when the desired track is reached.
Random playback
Current CD
Press
(RDM).
To cancel, press the button once more.
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more.
274
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Disc title are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding second or more will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 64 characters can be displayed.
for 1
3
If
is pressed for 1 second or more again, or has not been pressed
for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
Error messages
"ERROR": This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
"CD CHECK": The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
"WAIT":
Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press
. If the CD
still cannot be played back, contact your Toyota dealer.
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
Interior features
275
3-2. Using the audio system
CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)
276
NOTICE
3-2. Using the audio system Low-quality and deformed CDs
CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area
3
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off
CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. Do not apply oil to the CD player. Store CDs away from direct sunlight. Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
Interior features
277
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Power Volume
Disc eject
Random playback
Repeat play
Selecting a file or displays folder list
Selecting a file
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a folder, fast-forwarding
or reversing
Displays text message
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 273
Selecting and scanning a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
Press
( ) or
( ) to select the desired folder.
Selecting a folder and file from folder list
STEP 1 Press
.
The folder list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
278
3-2. Using the audio system
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Selecting and scanning files Selecting one file at a time
Turn
, or press "" or "" on
3
to select the desired file.
Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press
.
When the desired file is reached, press
once again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files P. 274
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off
Interior features
279
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Display
P. 275
Error messages
"CD CHECK":
This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
"ERROR":
This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
"NO SUPPORT": This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
Discs that can be used
P. 275
CD player protection feature
P. 276
280
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
If a CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
P. 276
Lens cleaners
P. 276
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
3
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
MP3 file compatibility
· Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
· Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
WMA file compatibility
· Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
· Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
281
3-2. Using the audio system
Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. · Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 · File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. · Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels · Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters · Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) · Maximum number of files per disc: 255
File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
282
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.
Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
3
Playback · To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. · CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. · There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used P. 276
CD player precautions P. 277
283
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Connecting an iPod
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
STEP 2
Press
.
284
3-2. Using the audio system
Control panel
Power Volume
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Shuffle playback
iPod menu
Repeat play
Selecting an iPod menu/song or
mode
displays song list
Selecting a song
Fast-forward 3
Reverse Playback Displays text message
Interior features
285
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
STEP 1 Press
(MENU) to select iPod menu mode.
STEP 2 Turning
clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-
lowing order: "Playlists""Artists""Albums""Songs""Podcasts""Genres" "Composers""Audiobooks"
STEP 3 Press
to select the desired play mode.
Play mode list
Play mode "Playlists" "Artists" "Albums"
First selection Playlists select
Artists select
Albums select
Second selection
Songs select
Albums select
Songs select
Third selection
-
Songs select
-
Fourth selection
-
-
-
"Songs"
Songs select
-
-
-
"Podcasts" "Genres" "Composers" "Audiobooks"
Podcasts select
Genre select
Composers select Audiobooks select
Episodes select
Artists select
Albums select Chapters select
-
Albums select Songs select
-
Songs select
-
-
286
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a list
STEP 1 Turn
to display the first selection list.
STEP 2 Press
to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
STEP 3 Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press
(BACK).
Selecting songs
Turn
or press "" or "" on
to select the desired song. 3
Selecting a song from the song list
STEP 1 Press
.
The song list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn
to select a song.
STEP 3 Press
to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
Interior features
287
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press
( ) or
( ).
Shuffle playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track shuffle Album shuffle Off
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
To return to the previous display, press
or
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
(BACK).
STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Press
to enter iPod menu mode. changes sound modes. (P. 300)
288
About iPod
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance 3 with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod functions
When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.
iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
Display
P. 275
289
3-2. Using the audio system
Error messages
"iPod ERROR": This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.
"ERROR 3":
This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.
"ERROR 4":
This indicates that an over current error has occurred.
"ERROR 5":
This indicates that an iPod communication error has occurred.
"ERROR 6":
This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.
"NO SONGS": This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
"NO PLAYLIST": This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
"UPDATE YOUR iPOD": This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
Compatible models The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Made for
· iPod touch (4th generation) · iPod touch (3rd generation) · iPod touch (2nd generation) · iPod touch (1st generation) · iPod classic · iPod with video · iPod nano (6th generation) · iPod nano (5th generation) · iPod nano (4th generation) · iPod nano (3rd generation) · iPod nano (2nd generation) · iPod nano (1st generation) · iPhone 4 · iPhone 3GS · iPhone 3G · iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.
290
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: Maximum number of lists in device: 9999 Maximum number of songs in device: 65535 Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
3
To prevent damage to iPod Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
291
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect a USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.
STEP 2
Press
.
292
Control panel
Power Volume
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback Repeat play
Selecting a file or displays folder list
3
Selecting a file
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a folder, fast-forwarding or reversing Displays text message
Interior features
293
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
To select the desired folder, press
( ) or
Selecting a folder and file from folder list
STEP 1 Press
.
The folder list will be displayed.
( ).
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press
Returning to the first folder
(BACK).
Press and hold
( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Selecting files
Turn
, or press "" or "" on
to select the desired file.
294
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning files
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files P. 288
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
3
Folder random Disc random Off
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Interior features
295
3-2. Using the audio system
USB memory functions Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.
Display P. 275
Error messages "ERROR": This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. "NO MUSIC": This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
USB memory Compatible devices USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback Compatible device formats The following device formats can be used: · USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps) · File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows) · Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: · Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels · Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root) · Maximum number of files in a device: 9999 · Maximum number of files per folder: 255
296
3-2. Using the audio system
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
MP3 file compatibility
· Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
· Compatible sampling frequencies
3
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz) · Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
· Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
· Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
Interior features
297
3-2. Using the audio system
ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3 and WMA playback · When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. · When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
Playback · To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. · There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
298
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
To prevent damage to USB memory Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
3
299
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Menu button Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
300
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
Changing sound quality modes
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2 Turn
to select "Sound Setting".
STEP 3 Press
.
STEP 4 Turn
to select the desired mode.
"BASS", "TREBLE", "FADER", "BALANCE", or "ASL"
3
STEP 5 Press
.
Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Mode
Sound
displayed quality mode
"BASS"
Bass*
"TREBLE"
Treble*
"FADER"
Front/rear volume balance
"BALANCE"
Left/right volume balance
Level -5 to 5 -5 to 5 R7 to F7
L7 to R7
Turn to the Turn to the
left
right
Low
High
Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Shifts to left Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Interior features
301
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turning
to the right changes the
amount of "ASL" in the order of "LOW", "MID" and "HIGH".
Turning
to the left turns "ASL" off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.
302
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle's speakers.
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
STEP 2
Press
.
3
Interior features
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.
303
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Volume Radio mode: Select radio stations CD mode: Selects tracks and files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode: Selects folders and files Bluetooth® audio mode: Selects an album and tracks
Turns the power on, selects audio source
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes each time will be skipped.
is pressed. If a mode cannot be used, it
304
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Press "+" on
to increase the volume and "-" to decrease the vol-
ume.
Press and hold
to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Silencing a sound
Press and hold
.
To cancel, press and hold
again.
3
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1 Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2 Press "" or "" on
to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold beep.
until you hear a
Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1 Press
to select CD, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth®
audio mode.
STEP 2 Press "" or "" on song.
to select the desired track/file or
Interior features
305
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a folder or album
STEP 1 Press mode.
to select CD, USB memory or Bluetooth® audio
STEP 2 Press and hold "" or "" on
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
306
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
Bluetooth® audio/phone
Bluetooth® audio The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Bluetooth® phone (hands-free phone system) This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone 3 and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
307
3-2. Using the audio system
Conditions affecting operation The Bluetooth® audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situations: The portable player does not support Bluetooth® The cellular phone is located outside the service area The Bluetooth® device is switched off The Bluetooth® device has a low battery The Bluetooth® device is not connected to the system The Bluetooth® device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or metal material covers or touches the device
When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 328)
About Bluetooth® Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
308
3-2. Using the audio system
Compatible models Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 1.1, or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
Following Profiles:
· A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
· AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
Cellular phone
· HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.5)
3
· OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
· PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone. Do not connect Bluetooth® device or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to Bluetooth® device Do not leave Bluetooth® device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the device.
Interior features
309
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone
Audio unit
Bluetooth® connection condition
If "BT" is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio/phone cannot be used.
Display A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.
Displays set up menu Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold)
Selects speed dials
On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
310
Steering wheel switches P. 304
Microphone
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
311
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio/phone, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® device in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a device:
STEP 1 Press
and select "Bluetooth" using
.
STEP 2 Press
and select "Pairing" using
.
A passkey will be displayed.
STEP 3 SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth® devices: Input the passkey into the device. SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices: Select "Yes" to register the device. Depending on the type of device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth® device has both music player and cellular phone functions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When deleting the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the "PHONE" mode is entered when no phones have been registered, the registration screen will be automatically displayed.
312
3-2. Using the audio system
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio/phone
First menu Second menu
Third menu
Operation details
"BT Pairing"
-
Registering a Bluetooth® device
"List Phone"
-
Listing the registered cellular phones
"List Audio"
-
Listing the registered portable players
"Passkey"
-
Changing the passkey
"Bluetooth" "BT Power"
Setting automatic
-
connection of the device 3
on or off
"Bluetooth info"
"Device Name" "Device Address"
Displaying the device status
"Display Setting"
Setting the automatic
-
connection confirmation
display to on or off
"Initialize"
-
Initializing the settings
Interior features
313
3-2. Using the audio system
First menu Second menu
"Phonebook" "Phone"
"HF Sound Setting" "Transfer Histories"
Third menu "Add contacts"
"Add SD"
"Delete Call History"
"Delete contacts"
"Delete other PB" "Call volume" "Ring tone volume" "Ringtone"
-
Operation details Adding a new number Registering a speed dial Deleting a number stored in the call history Deleting a number stored in the phonebook Deleting a phonebook's data Setting call volume
Setting ringtone volume
Setting the ringtone Transferring the call histories
Bluetooth® audio/phone system functions Depending on the Bluetooth® device, certain functions may not be available.
314
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Power Volume
Selecting an album, fast-forwarding or reversing Repeat play Random playback Selecting items
Interior features
Selecting a track
3
Search playback
Playback
Playback/Pause
Displays text message
Selecting an album
Press
( ) or
( ) to select the desired album.
Scanning an album
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track in the each album will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired album is reached, press
again.
Selecting tracks
Press "" or "" on
to select the desired track.
315
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning tracks
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of all tracks in the album will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired track is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press
(
) to play or pause a track.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks P. 288
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random All track random Off
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat Album repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title and Artist name are displayed on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
316
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
3
317
3-2. Using the audio system
Making a phone call
To enter the "PHONE" mode, press the off-hook switch.
Making a phone call Dialing by selecting a name Speed dialing Dialing by entering the number Dialing from call histories
Receiving a phone call Answering the phone Refusing the call
Operations during a call Transferring a call Muting your voice Inputting digits Setting call volume
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
318
3-2. Using the audio system
Dialing by selecting a name
STEP 1 Select "Phonebook" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired name using
and press the off-hook
switch.
By pressing
(Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from
to
) while the desired name is selected, it can be
registered as a speed dial.
Speed dialing
3
STEP 1 Select "Speed dials" using
.
STEP 2 Press the desired preset button (from press the off-hook switch.
to
) and
By pressing
(Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from
to
) while the desired name is selected, it can be
registered as a speed dial.
Dialing by entering the number
STEP 1 Select "Dial by number" using
.
STEP 2 Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
Interior features
319
3-2. Using the audio system
Dialing from call histories
STEP 1 Select "All calls", "Missed calls", "Incoming calls" or "Outgoing
calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select a desired number using switch.
The following operations can be performed: Registering a number as a speed dial
and press the off-hook
Press
(Add S. Dial) and then press and hold the desired
preset button (from
to
).
Deleting the selected number
Press
(DELETE) and press
(YES).
When receiving a phone call
Answering the phone Press the off-hook switch.
Refusing the call Press the on-hook switch.
Receiving a call when on another call Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
320
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
Operations during a call
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
b. Press the
* (PHONE).
*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from 3 the cellular phone to the system during a call.
Muting your voice
Press
(MUTE).
Inputting digits
Press its.
(0-9) and using the
to input the desired dig-
To send the input digits press
(SEND).
When finished, press
Setting call volume
(EXIT) to return to the previous screen.
Change the call volume using
.
To decrease the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
clockwise.
321
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
Change the ringtone volume using
.
To decrease the volume: Turn To increase the volume: Turn
counterclockwise. clockwise.
When talking on the phone Do not talk simultaneously with the other party. Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.
Automatic volume adjustment When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
Phone call system functions Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
Situations where the system may not recognize your voice When driving on a rough road When driving at high speeds When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
322
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the "SET UP" menu ("Bluetooth" menu)
Registering a Bluetooth® device in the system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered devices:
Functions and operation procedures
STEP 1 Press
and select "Bluetooth" using
.
STEP 2 Press
and select one of the following functions
using
.
Registering a Bluetooth® device
"BT Pairing"
3
Listing the registered cellular phones
"List Phone"
Listing the registered portable players "List Audio"
Changing the passkey "Passkey"
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off "BT Power"
Displaying the device status "Bluetooth info"
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off "Display Setting"
Initialization "Initialize"
Interior features
323
3-2. Using the audio system
Registering a portable player
Select "BT Pairing" using
, and perform the procedure for reg-
istering a portable player. (P. 312)
Listing the registered cellular phones
Select "List Phone" using
. The list of registered cellular
phones will be displayed.
Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
STEP 1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected
using
.
STEP 2 Select "Select" using
.
Deleting a registered cellular phone
STEP 1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using
.
STEP 2 Select "Delete" using
.
STEP 3 Press
(YES).
324
3-2. Using the audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select "List Audio" using
. The list of registered portable play-
ers will be displayed.
Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
STEP 1 Select the name of the portable player to be connected
using
.
STEP 2 Select "Select" using
.
Deleting the registered portable player
3
STEP 1 Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using
.
STEP 2 Select "Delete" using
.
STEP 3 Press
(YES).
Interior features
325
3-2. Using the audio system
Changing the passkey
STEP 1 Select "Passkey" using
.
STEP 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using
.
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press
again.
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing is not necessary.
again
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
If "BT Power" is set to on, the registered device will be connected automatically when the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" position.
STEP 1 Select "BT Power" using
.
STEP 2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using
.
326
3-2. Using the audio system
Displaying the device status
Select "Bluetooth info" using
.
Displaying the device name
Select "Device Name" using
.
Displaying the device address
Select "Device Address" using
.
3
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
If the "Display Setting" is set to on, the portable player connection status will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
STEP 1 Select "Display Setting" using
.
STEP 2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using
.
Interior features
327
3-2. Using the audio system
Initialization
Select "Initialize" using
.
Initializing the sound settings
Select "Sound setting" using
and press
For details about sound settings (P. 300)
Initializing the device information
(YES).
Select "Car Device Info" using
and press
(YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confirmation display and the passkey will be initialized.
Initializing the all settings
Select "All Initialize" using
and press
(YES).
The number of Bluetooth® device that can be registered Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered in the system.
328
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the "SET UP" menu ("Phone" menu)
Functions and operation procedures To enter the menu of each function, press
and follow
the steps below using
:
Adding a new phone number 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Add contacts"
Setting speed dials 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Add SD"
Deleting call histories
1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete Call History"
3
Deleting a registered phone number 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete contacts"
Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete other PB"
Setting call volume 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Call Volume"
Setting ringtone volume 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Ringtone Volume"
Setting ringtone 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Ringtone"
Transferring call histories 1. "Phone" 2. "Transfer Histories"
Interior features
329
3-2. Using the audio system
Adding a new phone number
Select "Add contacts" using
.
Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select "Overwrite all contacts" using
and press
(YES).
Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select "Add one contact" using
and press
(YES).
Setting speed dials
STEP 1 Select "Add SD" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired data using
.
STEP 3 Press and hold the desired preset button (from
to
). For details about setting speed dials from the call history (P. 320)
For details about deleting speed dials (P. 319)
330
3-2. Using the audio system
Deleting call histories
Select "Delete Call History" using
.
Deleting outgoing call history
STEP 1 Select "Outgoing Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
(YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press
then press
(YES).
Deleting incoming call history
STEP 1 Select "Incoming calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
(YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press
then press
(YES).
and press (ALL) and 3
and press (ALL) and
Interior features
331
3-2. Using the audio system
Deleting missed call history
STEP 1 Select "Missed Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
and press
(YES).
To delete all missed call history data, press
(ALL) and then
press
(YES).
Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming calls and Missed calls)
STEP 1 Select "All Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
(YES).
To delete all of the call histories data, press
press
(YES).
and press (ALL) and then
332
3-2. Using the audio system
Deleting a registered phone number
STEP 1 Select "Delete contacts" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
and press
(YES). To delete all of the registered phone numbers, select "All delete"
using
and press
(YES).
Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook
3
STEP 1 Select "Delete other PB" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phonebook using (YES).
Setting call volume
and press
STEP 1 Select "Call Volume" using STEP 2 Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
.
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
clockwise.
Interior features
333
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting ringtone volume
STEP 1 Select "Ringtone Volume" using
.
STEP 2 Change the ringtone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
Setting ringtone
clockwise.
STEP 1 Select "Ringtone" using
.
STEP 2 Using
, select a ringtone (1 - 3). To set the selected
ringtone, press
.
Transferring call histories
Select "Transfer Histories" using
and press
(YES).
Phone number Up to 1000 names can be stored.
Call history Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and missed call history memories.
Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
334
Interior features
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Toyota is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration (except the luggage compartment light) automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system), whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode or the engine switch position. The luggage compartment light turns on/off according to whether the back door is opened/closed.
3
Interior light (P. 337) Personal/interior lights (P. 336) Engine switch light Foot lights (if equipped) Luggage compartment light (turns on/off according to whether the back door is opened/closed)
335
3-3. Using the interior lights Personal/interior light main switch and personal/interior lights
Personal/interior light main switch
Type A Type B
Door position
The personal lights and interior light come on when a door is opened. They go off when the doors are closed.
Off
The personal lights and interior light can be individually turned on or off.
Personal/interior lights Type A
On/off
336
3-3. Using the interior lights Personal/interior lights and interior light and luggage compartment light
Type B
On/off
Interior light
Door position
3
Off
On
Luggage compartment light
On Off
Interior features
337
3-3. Using the interior lights
Luggage compartment light
To prevent battery discharge (excluding luggage compartment light)
If the lights remain on when a door is not fully closed and the personal/interior light main switch is in door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 528)
338
Interior features
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
3
Cup holders Bottle holders Auxiliary box Glove box Overhead console Console box
CAUTION
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. 339
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box
Unlock with the master key (vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system) Lock with the master key (vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system) Open (pull lever)
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.
340
Console box Upper tray
3-4. Using the storage features Console box
Lift the lid.
Lower box
3
Pull the lever up and lift the lid.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Interior features
341
3-4. Using the storage features
Overhead console
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.
Press the lid.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the overhead console closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Items unsuitable for storing Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg). Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.
342
Cup holders Type A
3-4. Using the storage features Cup holders
Removing the adapters changes the size. (P. 343)
Type B
3
To use the cup holders, pull the strap forward and fold down the center seatback.
Adjusting size of the cup holders (type A only) Remove the adapters.
Interior features
343
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders and bottle holders
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
Bottle holders
Front seat
Second seat
344
Third seat
3-4. Using the storage features Bottle holders
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
3
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
Interior features
345
3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary box
Auxiliary box
To open and close the auxiliary box, press the button.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
Operating the auxiliary box If it is difficult to open or close the auxiliary box on a steep hill, move the vehicle to a level place. To avoid damage to the auxiliary box, do not apply excessive force to operate it.
346
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position: Flip down.
Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.
Side extender: Place in side position then slide backwards.
3
Interior features
347
3-5. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the cover is opened.
348
Interior features
3-5. Other interior features
Clock
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system Adjusts the hours. Adjusts the minutes. Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 2:00
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system Adjusts the hours.
3
Adjusts the minutes. Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 2:00
The clock is displayed when Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Vehicles with smart key system
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
349
3-5. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that use less than 10 A. 120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W. 12 V Type A
Type B
Type C
350
120 VAC (if equipped)
3-5. Other interior features
3
The power outlet can be used when
12 V
Vehicles without smart key system The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
Vehicles with smart key system The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
120 VAC
Vehicles without smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with smart key system The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Interior features
351
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
Using a power outlet Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury. Use of the power outlet when it is wet with water or snow may result in electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be thoroughly dried before use. Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet. Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid. When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices written on their labels and in the manufacturers' instruction manuals. Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact your Toyota dealer for any necessary repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, securely fix all electric appliances before use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following: Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving. Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating while driving. Emit steam while the windows of the cabin are closed.
To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not perform any of the following: Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping. Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud. Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or feet. Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet. Using malfunctioning electric appliances. Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.
352
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug
Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
Do not allow foreign objects or liquids to enter the power outlet, as this may cause a short circuit.
Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.
After removing a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.
To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 VAC
3
Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W.
Appliances with high initial peak wattage
Measuring devices that process precise data
Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
Interior features
353
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
To prevent any damage caused by heat Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat, such as toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and deck. Do not use any electrical appliances that are easily affected by vibration or heat inside the vehicle. Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances.
If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from falling or getting caught in any of the power train components.
If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is connected Replace the outlet. Contact your Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements.
If the power outlet gets dirty Use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently. Do not use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction.
354
3-5. Other interior features
Seat heaters
Heats the driver's seat Heats the front passenger's seat
The indicator light is on while the seat heater is operating.
Push the switch once again to turn off the seat heater.
The seat heaters can be used when
3
Vehicles without smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with smart key system The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
Burns Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: · Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled · Persons with sensitive skin · Persons who are fatigued · Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Interior features
: If equipped
355
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
356
Interior features
3-5. Other interior features
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull the strap forward and fold down the center seatback.
NOTICE
3
To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
357
3-5. Other interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
Items that must not be hung on the hook Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the coat hook Do not place too much load on the coat hook.
358
3-5. Other interior features
Floor mat
Interior features
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
The shape of the retaining
hooks (clips) and the fixing
procedure of the floor mat for
your vehicle may differ from
those shown in the illustration.
For details, refer to the floor
mat retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
3
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
When installing the driver's floor mat Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat. Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.
359
3-5. Other interior features
Luggage compartment features
Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.
Grocery bag hooks
Storage box (vehicles without third seats) Type A
The rear deck board can be folded up into two positions.
STEP 1
Lift the rear deck board.
360
STEP 2
Type B
3-5. Other interior features
Fold up the deck board.
The lid can be removed.
Lift the front deck board.
3
Interior features
361
3-5. Other interior features
Luggage cover (if equipped)
STEP 1
Attach the hooks to the head restraints.
If necessary, move the second seats to enable the hook engagement.
STEP 2
Pull out the luggage cover and hook onto the anchors.
Removing the luggage cover (if equipped)
The luggage cover can be removed by following the procedure below.
STEP 1 Detach the hooks of the luggage cover.
STEP 2
Compress the end of the luggage cover and lift the luggage cover up.
362
3-5. Other interior features
Stowing the luggage cover (if equipped)
STEP 1
Open the rear deck board and remove the deck side cover.
STEP 2
3
Insert the right end of the luggage cover into the recess, then compress the left end of the luggage cover and insert it into the recess.
Interior features
363
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
When the cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
Caution while driving Do not drive with any of the deck boards opened. Items may fall out and cause injury. Do not place anything on the luggage cover to avoid death or serious injury.
When installing/stowing the luggage cover Make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the grocery bag hooks Do not hang heavy loads on the hooks.
364
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water. Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
Automatic car washes Before washing the vehicle, do the following. · Fold the mirrors back. · Remove the antenna. Make sure to re-install the antenna and extend the mirrors before driving. Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint.
High pressure car washes Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
366
4-1. Maintenance and care
Aluminum wheels Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather. Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Bumpers Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
4
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
367
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.) Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: · After driving near the sea coast · After driving on salted roads · If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface · If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint · After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances · If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud · If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.
Cleaning the exterior lights Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
Antenna installation and removal precautions Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed. When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
368
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain- 4 ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.
Synthetic leather areas Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather. Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
369
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Caring for leather areas Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire. Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 103) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
370
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.
Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
4
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the windows clean. Wipe the windows in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
Maintenance and care
371
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".
Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".
Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
372
4-2. Maintenance
Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only) After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, follow the procedures described below: Vehicles without smart key system STEP 1 Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 161) STEP 2 While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the engine switch to the "ON" position. STEP 3 Press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000". Vehicles with smart key system STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch off with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 161) STEP 2 While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode. STEP 3 Press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000".
4
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.
373
Maintenance and care
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
Warning in handling of battery Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 397)
374
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Battery Brake fluid Engine coolant Engine oil Exhaust system
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Washer fluid
Check points
Maintenance-free. (P. 397)
At the correct level? (P. 395)
At the correct level? (P. 393)
At the correct level? (P. 390)
No fumes or strange sounds?
4
Not blocked with foreign matter? (P. 395)
At the correct level? (P. 400)
Maintenance and care
375
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Accelerator pedal Automatic transmission "Park" mechanism
Brake pedal
Brakes
Head restraints Indicators/buzzers Lights Parking brake
Seat belts Seats Steering wheel
Check points
· Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?
· Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in P?
· Moves smoothly? · Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free play?
· Not pull to one side when applied?
· Loss of brake effectiveness? · Spongy feeling brake pedal? · Pedal almost touches floor?
· Move smoothly and lock securely?
· Function properly?
· Do all the lights come on? · Headlights aimed correctly?
· Moves smoothly? · Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
· Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?
· Are the belts undamaged?
· Do the seat controls operate properly?
· Moves smoothly? · Has correct free play? · No strange noises?
376
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Doors Engine hood Fluid leaks
Tires
Check points
· Operate smoothly?
· The lock system works properly?
· Is there any leakage after parking?
· Inflation pressure is correct? · Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged? · Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule? · Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
4
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
Maintenance and care
377
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.
Items
Parts and tools
Battery condition
(P. 397)
· Warm water · Baking soda · Grease · Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level
(P. 395)
· FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
· Rag or paper towel · Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
· "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant"
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
4
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
"Toyota Super Long Life
Engine coolant level (P. 393)
Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
"Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant" is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
· Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level
(P. 390)
· Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
· Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding oil)
Maintenance and care
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Fuses
(P. 421)
Radiator and condenser (P. 395)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 408)
Washer fluid
(P. 400)
Light bulb
(P. 433)
Parts and tools
· Fuse with same amperage rating as original
· Tire pressure gauge · Compressed air source
· Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
· Funnel
· Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
· Flathead screwdriver
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. When working on the engine compartment
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage 4 painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille Vehicles without smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With the engine switch in the "ON" position, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 395) Vehicles with smart key system: Be sure the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is OFF. With the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 395)
Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.
381
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
4
Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.
Maintenance and care
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
After installing the support rod into the slot Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.
NOTICE
When closing the hood Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
4
385
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When raising your vehicle Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury. Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.
Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack. Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface. Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift
the shift lever in P. Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack. Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Maintenance and care
4
Fuse boxes
(P. 421)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 393)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 391)
Battery
(P. 397)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 395)
Radiator
(P. 395)
Condenser
(P. 395)
Electric cooling fans
Engine oil level dipstick (P. 390)
Washer fluid tank (P. 400)
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Fuse boxes
(P. 421)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 393)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 391)
Battery
(P. 397)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 395)
Radiator
(P. 395)
Condenser
(P. 395)
Electric cooling fans
Engine oil level dipstick (P. 390)
Washer fluid tank (P. 400)
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover Removing the engine compartment cover
Installing the clips
4
NOTICE
After installing an engine compartment cover Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
389
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
STEP 2
Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
STEP 3 Wipe the dipstick clean. STEP 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. STEP 5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level. STEP 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Low Full
390
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Low Full
Maintenance and care
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
4
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
Oil quantity (Low Full)
Item
P. 506 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) Clean funnel
STEP 1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. STEP 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. STEP 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic
CAUTION
Used engine oil Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged. Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
4
"FULL"
"LOW"
If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.
Maintenance and care
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Coolant selection Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C]) Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be 4 between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.
Maintenance and care
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Adding fluid
Fluid type Items
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid Clean funnel
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals Hold-down clamp
Before recharging
4
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable. Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery. After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem) In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the "ENGINE START STOP"
switch OFF. STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors. STEP 3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the
procedure.)
397
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Chemicals in the battery A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery: Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. Keep children away from the battery.
Where to safely charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
How to recharge the battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
4
NOTICE
When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
399
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
Add washer fluid in the following situations.
Any washer does not work.
The low washer fluid warning light comes on.
For vehicles sold in Canada If any washer does not work or the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
CAUTION
When filling the washer fluid Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or " " marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.
Tire rotation
4
Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires
Front
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Maintenance and care
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Except vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
The tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 456)
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 403) Registering ID codes (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and 4 transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.
403
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When to replace your vehicle's tires Tires should be replaced if: You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage. A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage. If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
Maximum load of tire Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 517)
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire types 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con- 4 struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 220)
Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
405
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire pressure warning system certification FCC ID: PAXPMV107J FCC ID: HYQ13BCX For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota. Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. Do not tow the vehicle with the spare tire installed.
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 403)
4
Do not use puncture sealant sprays to repair flats (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
Puncture sealant sprays may damage tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
Maintenance and care
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 517)
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1 Remove the tire valve cap. STEP 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. STEP 3 Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. STEP 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended
levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
4
lower. STEP 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. STEP 6 Reinstall the tire valve cap.
Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.
409
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: Reduced fuel efficiency Reduced driving comfort and tire life Reduced safety Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury. Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires Poor sealing of the tire bead Wheel deformation and/or tire separation A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
4
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
411
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as "offset". Toyota does not recommend using: Wheels of different sizes or types Used wheels Bent wheels that have been straightened Aluminum wheel precautions Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels. When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains. Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 403)
CAUTION
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious injury or death.
4
When installing the wheel nuts
Tapered portion
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Maintenance and care
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with a tire pressure warning system) Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer. Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method STEP 1 Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
off. Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch off.
STEP 2
Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.
STEP 3
4
Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.
STEP 4
Remove the filter cover.
Maintenance and care
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.
The "UP" marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.
Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace it if necessary.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
416
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
You will need the following items: Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.)
Small Flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without smart key system) or CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system)
Replacing the battery (vehicles without smart key system)
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
STEP 2
4
Remove the module.
Maintenance and care
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Open the case cover using a coin protected with tape etc. and remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
Replacing the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
418
STEP 3
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
Maintenance and care
If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur.
The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
The operational range is reduced.
4
Use a CR2016 (vehicles without smart key system) or CR1632 (vehicles
with smart key system) lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your Toyota dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
420
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1 Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch off.
STEP 2 The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below.
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment Type A: Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
4
Type B: Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
421
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Under the instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP 4 After a system failure, see "Fuse layout and amperage ratings" (P. 425) for details about which fuse to check.
STEP 5
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
STEP 6 Check if the fuse has blown.
422
Type A Type B Type C
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
4
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Maintenance and care
423
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type D
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Type E
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
424
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings Engine compartment
Type A (driver's side)
Maintenance and care
Fuse 1 SPARE 2 SPARE 3 SPARE
4 ECU-B2
5 ALT-S 6 STR LOCK 7 RAD NO.1
4
Ampere
Circuit
30 A Spare fuse
20 A Spare fuse
10 A Spare fuse
7.5 A
Air conditioning system, power windows, smart key system
7.5 A Charging system
20 A Smart key system
20 A Audio system
425
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
8 ECU-B
9 DOME
10 H-LP LH 11 H-LP RH 12 H-LP LL 13 H-LP RL 14 AC INV 15 TOWING*1 16 STV HTR*2 17 DEICER 18 HTR 19 PTC 2*2 20 PTC 1*2 21 HEAD MAIN
RDI*2 22
FAN 2*1
Ampere
10 A
10 A
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 30 A 25 A 20 A 50 A 30 A 30 A 50 A 30 A 50 A
Circuit
Gauges and meters, clock, main body ECU, wireless remote control, smart key system, audio system, front passenger occupant classification system, ABS, TRAC, VSC, AUTO LSD, downhill assist control system, hill-start assist control system, Active Torque Control 4WD system
Vanity lights, personal/interior lights, interior light, luggage compartment light, engine switch light, foot lights
Left-hand headlight (high beam)
Right-hand headlight (high beam)
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
AC inverter
No circuit
No circuit
Windshield wiper deicer
Air conditioning system
PTC heater
PTC heater
H-LP LH, H-LP RH, H-LP LL, H-LP RL fuses
Electric cooling fan
426
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse CDS*2 23 FAN 1*3 24 H-LP CLN
Ampere 30 A 50 A 30 A
Circuit Electric cooling fan No circuit
*1: Vehicles with towing package *2: Vehicles with 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine *3: Vehicles with 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Type B (passenger's side)
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse 1 AMP 2 AM2
3 IG2
4 HAZ
5 ETCS
Ampere 30 A 30 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
Circuit
Audio system
Starting system
Starting system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Emergency flashers
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
427
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse 6 AM2-2 7 EFI NO.1
8 EFI NO.2 9 EFI NO.3 10 GROW 11 EPMS 12 MAIN
13 ALT
14 P/I 15 ABS2
16 ABS1
17 EFI MAIN 18 HORN 19 EDU 428
Ampere 7.5 A 10 A
10 A 7.5 A 80 A 60 A 80 A
120 A*1 140 A*2
50 A 30 A
50 A
20 A 10 A 25 A
Circuit
Starting system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
No circuit
No circuit
Electric power steering system
HEAD MAIN, ECU-B2, ALT-S, STR LOCK, DOME, ECU-B, RAD NO.1 fuses ABS 1, ABS 2, RDI*3, CDS*3, FAN 1*4, AC INV, TOWING, HTR, DEICER fuses
ABS 1, ABS 2, FAN 1, FAN 2, AC INV, TOWING, HTR, DEICER fuses
EFI MAIN, HORN, A/F, fuses
ABS, TRAC, VSC, AUTO LSD function, downhill assist control system, hill-start assist control system
ABS, TRAC, VSC, AUTO LSD function, downhill assist control system, hill-start assist control system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.1, EFI NO.2, fuses
Horn
No circuit
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse 20 A/F
Ampere
Circuit
20 A A/F sensor, fuel pump*3
*1: Vehicles without towing package *2: Vehicles with towing package *3: Vehicles with 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine *4: Vehicles with 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine Under the instrument panel
Maintenance and care
4
Fuse
1 TAIL
2 PANEL 3 GAUGE 1 4 D FR DOOR 5 RL DOOR 6 RR DOOR 7 S/ROOF 8 CIG
Ampere
10 A
7.5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 25 A 15 A
Circuit Parking lights, tail lights, license plate light, front fog lights, rear side marker lights Clock, instrument panel lights, audio system Back-up lights, charging system Power windows (front doors) Power windows Power windows Electric moon roof Power outlet
429
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse 9 ACC 10 MIR HTR 11 PWR OUTLET 12 RR FOG
13 IGN
14 GAUGE 2 15 S-HTR 16 FR WIP 17 RR WIP 18 WSH
19 ECU IG 1
20 ECU IG 2
Ampere 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A 15 A 25 A 15 A 15 A
10 A
10 A
Circuit
Audio system, power outlets, power rear view mirror control, automatic transmission shift lock system, main body ECU, clock, smart key system
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Power outlet
No circuit
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, steering lock system, front passenger occupant classification system, smart key system, SRS airbag system
Gauges and meters
Seat heaters
Windshield wipers
Rear window wiper
Windshield washer, rear window washer
Electric cooling fan, ABS, TRAC, VSC, AUTO LSD function, downhill assist control system, hill-start assist control system, Active Torque Control 4WD system, automatic transmission shift lock system, air conditioning system, main body ECU, electric moon roof, stop/tail lights, electric power steering system, clock, AC inverter, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Air conditioning system, rear window defogger, emergency flashers
430
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse 21 OBD
22 STOP
23 DOOR 24 ACC-B 25 4WD 26 FR FOG 27 AM1* 28 DEF 29 P/SEAT 30 POWER
Ampere
Circuit
7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
10 A
Stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight, automatic transmission shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, ABS, TRAC, VSC, AUTO LSD function, downhill assist control system, hill-start assist control system
25 A
Main body ECU, power door lock system
25 A ACC, CIG, fuses
7.5 A Active Torque Control 4WD system
15 A Front fog lights
7.5 A Starting system
4
30 A
Rear window defogger, MIR HTR fuse
30 A Power seat
30 A Power windows
*: Vehicles without smart key system
Maintenance and care
431
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
After a fuse is replaced If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 433) If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire. Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
432
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.
Preparing a light bulb for replacement Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 513)
Removing the engine compartment cover P. 389
Front bulb locations
Front turn signal, parking and
front side marker lights
Headlight
low beam
4
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Headlight high beam and daytime running lights
Maintenance and care
433
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear bulb locations Vehicles without a spare tire
Rear side marker lights
Rear turn signal and back-up lights
Vehicles with a spare tire
Rear side marker lights
License plate lights
Rear turn signal and back-up lights
License plate light
434
Replacing light bulbs Headlights
STEP 1
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Right side only: Remove the clip and move it aside to allow easy access to the light bulbs.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Headlight (low beam) Headlight (high beam)
4
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
Maintenance and care
435
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Reinstalling the clip
Front turn signal, parking and front side marker lights
STEP 1
Right side only: Remove the clip and move it aside to allow easy access to the light bulbs.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
436
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Reinstalling the clip
Maintenance and care
Front fog lights (if equipped)
STEP 1
Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the front fog light that you wish to replace.
For example, if you wish to
replace the front fog light on the
right side, turn the steering wheel
to the left.
4
STEP 2
Remove the clip using a flathead screwdriver wrapped in a rag.
STEP 3
Move section "A" of the fender liner to the inner side of the vehicle, partly removing it and thereby allowing access to the front fog light.
437
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 4
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
STEP 5
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Back-up lights, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights
STEP 1
Open the back door (P. 48) and remove the cover.
STEP 2 438
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Rear side marker light Rear turn signal light Back-up light
STEP 3
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb. Rear side marker light Rear turn signal light Back-up light
License plate lights Vehicles without a spare tire
STEP 1
Remove the cover as shown in the illustration.
STEP 2
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
439
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Vehicles with a spare tire
STEP 1
Use a flathead screwdriver to disengage the side of the lamp.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
Light other than the above If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer. High mounted stoplight Stop/tail lights Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
440
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. Water has built up inside the headlight.
LED side turn signal lights (if equipped), stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight The side turn signal lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
4
441
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Replacing light bulbs Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
442
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
444
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. 2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (P. 448, 451) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. 4WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (P. 448, 451)
Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing. The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move. The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
5
445
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Towing eyelet
446
Installing towing eyelet
STEP 1
STEP 2
5-1. Essential information
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut 5 wrench.
When trouble arises
447
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.
From the front (4WD models)
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
448
From the rear
5-1. Essential information
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
When trouble arises
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
5
Emergency towing procedure STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch to "ACC" (engine off) or "ON" (engine running) position.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode. Location of the emergency towing eyelet The emergency towing eyelet is in the tool bag. (P. 467)
449
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
Caution while towing Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing. If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
450
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD system (4WD models) when towing using a wheellift type truck
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. If towing from the rear, use a towing dolly.
CTN51AN026
4WD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD system. Use a towing dolly.
CTN51AN027
5
To prevent damaging the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the Active Torque Control 4WD system (4WD models) and transmission. (P. 242)
When trouble arises
451
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal
Audible symptoms Changes in exhaust sound Excessive tire squeal when cornering Strange noises related to the suspension system Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms Engine missing, stumbling or running rough Appreciable loss of power Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
452
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
Vehicles without smart key system STEP 1 Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. STEP 2 Restart the engine.
Vehicles with smart key system STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF. STEP 2 Restart the engine.
NOTICE
Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
5
453
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* · Low brake fluid · Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
5
Indicates a malfunction in:
(U.S.A.)
· The emission control system;
· The electronic engine control system;
· The electronic throttle control system; or
(Canada) · The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The SRS airbag system; · The front passenger occupant classification system; or · The seat belt pretensioner system.
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
"ABS" warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The ABS; · The brake assist system.
Electric power steering system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.
(Flashes) (Comes on)
Cruise control indicator light Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
Slip indicator light Indicates a malfunction in: · The VSC; · The TRAC; · The AUTO LSD function; · The hill-start assist control; and · The downhill assist control system.
Active Torque Control 4WD system warning light (4WD models) Indicates a malfunction in the Active Torque Control 4WD system. (When the light flashes. P. 456)
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Open door warning light Indicates that a door is not fully closed.
Correction procedure
Check that all doors are closed.
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is about 2.4 gal. (9.0 L, 2.0 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*1
Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(on the center panel)
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*1
Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(Flashes)
Active Torque Control
4WD system warning light Reduce vehicle speed (until
(4WD models)
the light goes off) or stop
Indicates that the driveline the vehicle at a safe place
temperature is too high.
and allow the engine to idle 5
(When the light comes on. until the light goes off.
P. 455)
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped)
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift lever to P. If the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.
Low washer fluid warning light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details Tire pressure warning light (if equipped)
When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as · Natural causes (P. 462) · Flat tire (P. 467, 485)
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system (P. 463)
Correction procedure
Adjust the tire inflation pressure (including the spare tire) to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Maintenance required reminder light
Indicates that maintenance is required according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule.*2
(U.S.A.)
Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds Perform the necessary
5000 miles (8000 km) after maintenance.
the maintenance data has Please reset the mainte-
been reset.
nance data after the mainte-
(The indicator will not work nance is performed.
properly unless the mainte- (P. 373)
nance data has been reset.)
5
*1:Driver's and front passenger's seat belt warning buzzers
The driver's and front passenger's seat belt warning buzzers sound to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*2:Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Interior Exterior Warning
buzzer buzzer
light
Warning light/Details
Smart key system warning
light
Once
(Comes
Indicates that the electronic key is not present when the
on for 8 "ENGINE START STOP"
seconds.) switch is pressed.
Once 3 times
Smart key system warning light
Indicates that a door other than the driver's door has been opened and closed with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area.
Once 3 times
Smart key system warning light
Indicates that the driver's door has been opened and closed with the shift lever in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area.
Correction procedure
Confirm the location of the electronic key*.
Confirm the location of the electronic key.
Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key.
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning
buzzer buzzer
light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Continuous Continuous
Smart key system warning light
Indicates that the driver's door has been opened and closed with the shift lever not in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area.
· Shift the shift lever to P.
· Confirm the location of the electronic key.
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 32)
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
Is the fuel tank cap loose?
5
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
Electric power steering system warning light
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on.
461
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher. The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby. If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
If tire chains are used. If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal
reception. If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is
put in the luggage compartment. If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch or the engine switch is turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer. Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 528) However, Toyota recommends that the seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger that the seat belts are not fastened.
5
463
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When the electric power steering system warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly hold and operate it using more force than usual.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. Vehicles with run-flat tires: · Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h). · Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. · If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer. · Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. Vehicles with standard tires: · Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. · If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer. · Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the 5 level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
465
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided. Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. Set the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to P. Stop the engine. Turn on the emergency flashers. Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Tool bag
Spare tire
5
Jack
When trouble arises
467
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
STEP 1
Disengage the claws and remove the cover.
STEP 2
Loosen Tighten Loosen and take out the jack.
468
Taking out the tool bag
STEP 1
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Disengage the claws and remove the cover.
STEP 2
Take out the tool bag.
5
When trouble arises
469
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire (vehicles with the spare tire cover)
STEP 1
Open the back door. Unlock the latch handle which is on the bottom of the spare tire cover.
STEP 2 Close the back door.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Remove the spare tire cover by holding the bottom and lifting it up and away from the vehicle.
When placing the spare tire cover on the ground, make sure the cover design side faces up to avoid scratching the cover surface.
Using the wheel nut wrench, loosen the hold-down nuts by turning them counterclockwise until they can be loosened by hand. Follow the order shown in the illustration.
STEP 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the spare tire.
When placing the spare tire on the ground, make sure the wheel design side faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
470
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire (vehicles without the spare tire cover)
STEP 1
Using the wheel nut wrench, loosen the hold-down nuts by turning them counterclockwise until they can be loosened by hand. Follow the order shown in the illustration.
STEP 2 Remove all the wheel nuts and the spare tire.
When placing the spare tire on the ground, make sure the wheel design side faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
5
When trouble arises
471
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Front
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Rear
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Wheel chock posi-
tions
Behind the rear righthand side tire
Behind the rear lefthand side tire
In front of the front right-hand side tire
In front of the front left-hand side tire
472
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2 Remove the wheel ornament using the wheel nut wrench as shown below.
16-inch wheel To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament, as shown in the illustration.
17-inch and 18-inch wheels
STEP 3
5
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).
When trouble arises
473
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Turn the tire jack portion "A" by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
STEP 5
Type A: Assemble the jack handle extension.
STEP 5
Type B: Assemble the jack handle extension.
474
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 6 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. Type A
Type B
5
Type C
475
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 7
Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.
476
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel
Tapered portion Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.
Disc wheel seat
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel
Tapered portion Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.
Disc wheel seat
5
Replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel
Disc wheel
Turn the nut washers until they come into contact with the disc wheel.
Washer
When trouble arises
477
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3 Lower the vehicle. Type A
Type B
Type C
478
STEP 4
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
STEP 5 Reinstall the wheel ornament. 16-inch wheel
17-inch and 18-inch wheels
5
When trouble arises
479
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stowing the flat tire
STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the disc wheel seat and the wheel contact surface.
STEP 2
Vehicles with aluminum wheels and a steel wheel for the spare: Remove the plastic rings from the wheel nuts of the spare tire carrier.
STEP 3 Close the back door.
STEP 4 Stow the flat tire on the back door and tighten all wheel nuts by hand.
STEP 5
Using the wheel nut wrench, tighten the hold-down nuts by turning them clockwise. Follow the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque: 66.4 ft·lbf (90 N·m, 9.1 kgf·m)
480
STEP 6
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Insert the hooks into the upper slots and lower the cover to install the spare tire cover.
Upper slots Hooks
When trouble arises
STEP 7
Attach the cover by hooking the 2 inner protrusions.
Check that the cover is securely attached.
5
STEP 8
STEP 9 Close the back door.
Open the back door and lock the latch handle which is on the bottom of the cover.
Hook Latch handle Clasp
481
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 10 Stow the jack and all tools securely, and replace all the covers.
When reinstalling the wheel ornament (vehicles with 16-inch wheels) Align the cutout of the wheel ornament with the valve stem as shown.
After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 403)
After repairing the flat tire (vehicles with aluminum wheels and a steel wheel for the spare) Be sure to reinstall the plastic rings to the wheel nuts before stowing the spare tire. If the steel wheel is stowed without reinstalling the plastic rings to the wheel nuts, the spare tire carrier may produce abnormal noise when the vehicle is moving.
482
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
5
Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and level ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
Using the jack handle (type A)
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
When trouble arises
483
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Replacing a flat tire Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury. · Do not try to remove the ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury. · Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
· Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
· Make sure that the rubber rings are not installed to the wheel nuts for aluminum wheel.
· When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (P. 413)
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.
When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system) When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 403)
484
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run-flat tires)
Take your vehicle to the nearest Toyota dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible. Run-flat tires (A "RFT" or "DSST" mark is molded on the
sidewall) You can continue driving a vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat. It is possible to run for a maximum of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 55 mph (90 km/h) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. (P. 454)
In some condition (such as at high temperatures) You cannot continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).
If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat tires
5
Consult your Toyota dealer. For the detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty book.
NOTICE
When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
485
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 147, 151) or releasing the steering lock, (P. 147, 151), consider each of the following points.
The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle. The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (P. 147, 151) There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 97)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. The battery may be discharged. (P. 491) The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. The battery may be discharged. (P. 491) There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehicles with smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
486
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1 Set the parking brake. STEP 2 Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the "LOCK" position. Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch off. STEP 3 Depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
STEP 5
5
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
When trouble arises
487
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
488
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is interrupted (P. 32) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and back door can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors with the mechanical key
Starting the engine
Using the mechanical key (P. 26) in order to perform the following operations:
Locks all doors Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlock the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.
5
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
STEP 2
Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the "ENGINE START STOP" switch.
If any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is being touched to the switch, an alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key.
When trouble arises
489
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3 Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the "ENGINE START STOP" switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
Stopping the engine Shift the shift lever to P and press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 418)
Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes Within 5 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 148)
490
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged. You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below.
STEP 1
Connecting the jumper cables
5
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. STEP 2 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. STEP 3 Vehicles with smart key system -- Open and close any of the doors with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
491
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without smart key system) or turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system), to start the vehicle's engine.
STEP 5 Once the vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
To prevent battery discharge Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off. Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Charging the battery The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
492
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the "+" and "-" terminals. Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.
Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. Do not lean over the battery. In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, 5 immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
493
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
STEP 2 Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood. If you see steam: Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine. If you do not see steam: Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3 Check to see if the cooling fans are operating. If the fans are operating: Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine. If the fans are not operating: Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
STEP 54
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
If the engine compartment cover needs to be removed.
(P. 389)
STEP 5
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 509)
494
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating. The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced. Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns. Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running. Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are 5 hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
495
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.
STEP 2 Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire. STEP 3 Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires. STEP 4 Restart the engine. STEP 5 4WD models: Activate four-wheel drive lock mode. (P. 206) STEP 6 Shift the shift lever to the D or R position, release the park-
ing brake and carefully depress the accelerator pedal to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and/or VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 196)
CAUTION
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
496
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine. If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
5
497
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road. STEP 4 Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
STEP 4
Vehicles without a smart key system: Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the "ACC" position.
498
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Vehicles with a smart key system: Stop the engine by pressing and holding the "ENGINE START STOP" switch for 3 consecutive seconds or more.
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP 5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
If the engine has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine. Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
5
When trouble arises
499
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 500
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height*6
Wheelbase Front tread Rear tread Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)
178.7 in. (4540 mm)*1 180.7 in. (4590 mm)*2 180.9 in. (4595 mm)*3 181.1 in. (4600 mm)*4 181.9 in. (4620 mm)*5
Without over fender 71.5 in. (1815 mm) With over fender 73.0 in. (1855 mm)
Without roof rails 66.3 in. (1685 mm) 66.5 in. (1690 mm)*7 With roof rails 68.7 in. (1745 mm) 69.1 in. (1755 mm)*7
104.7 in. (2660 mm)
61.4 in. (1560 mm) 61.8 in. (1570 mm)*4
61.4 in. (1560 mm) 61.8 in. (1570 mm)*4
825 lb. (375 kg) 1155 lb. (525 kg)*7
502
6-1. Specifications
Trailer Weight Rating (Trailer weight + cargo weight)
*1: Without spare tire *2: 215/70R16 tires *3: 225/65R17 tires *4: 235/55R18 tires *5: With spare tire cover *6: Unladen vehicle *7: With third seats *8: With towing package
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine 1500 lb. (680 kg) 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine 2000 lb. (905 kg) 3500 lb. (1585 kg)*8
6
Vehicle specifications
503
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.
On some models, this number is stamped under the front passenger's seat.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
504
6-1. Specifications
Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Vehicle specifications
Engine
Model Type
Bore and stroke Displacement Drive belt tension
2AR-FE
6
2GR-FE
4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
3.54 × 3.86 in. (90.0 × 98.0 mm)
152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3)
3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)
210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Automatic adjustment
505
6-1. Specifications
Fuel
Fuel type
Octane rating
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
Unleaded gasoline only 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system
Oil capacity (Drain and refill reference*)
Without filter
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.) 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
With filter
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine 4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.) 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
506
6-1. Specifications
Recommended viscosity: 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil may be used. However, SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
6
507
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
508
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity (Reference)
Coolant type
*: With towing package Ignition system
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine 7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.) 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine 9.4 qt. (8.9 L, 7.8 Imp. qt.) 9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.2 Imp. qt.)*
Use either of the following. · "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" · Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug Make
Gap
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine DENSO, SK16HR11 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine DENSO FK20HR11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
6
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning the engine.
Vehicle specifications
509
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at 68°F (20°C):
Charging rates
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (*: Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)
5 A max.
Rear differential (4WD models)
Oil capacity Oil type
Recommended oil viscosity
0.5 qt. (0.5 L, 0.4 Imp. qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE 90 Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
Automatic transaxle
Fluid capacity Fluid type
4-speed models 8.6 qt. (8.1 L, 7.1 Imp. qt.) 5-speed models 9.3 qt. (8.8 L, 7.7 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Automatic transmission fluid type Using automatic transmission fluid other than "Toyota Genuine ATF WS" may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
510
6-1. Specifications
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity Oil type
Recommended oil viscosity
0.48 qt. (0.45 L, 0.40 Imp. qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE 90 Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
Without third seats 3.7 in. (95 mm) With third seats 4.7 in. (120 mm)
Pedal free play
0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit Parking brake lever travel*2
0.04 in. (1.0 mm) 6 8 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N, 21 6 kgf)
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Vehicle specifications
511
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque *1: Steel wheels *2: Aluminum wheels
Type B
215/70R16 99H, 225/65R17 101H, 235/55R18 99H
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
16 × 6 1/2 J, 17 × 6 1/2 J*1, 17 × 7J*2, 18 × 7 1/2 J
76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
P235/55R18 99H
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
18 × 7 1/2 J 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
512
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Exterior Interior
Light Bulbs Headlights
High beam Low beam Front fog lights* Front turn signal/parking, front side marker lights Rear side marker lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up lights License plate lights Vanity lights Front personal lights Interior light Luggage compartment light
Bulb No. W
9005
60
9006
51
55
7443
21/5
5
7440
21
921
16
168
5
8
8
8
5
Type
A B C
D
D E D D D D F F
A: HB3 halogen bulbs C: H11 halogen bulbs E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
B: HB4 halogen bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped
6
Vehicle specifications
513
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If your engine knocks Consult your Toyota dealer. You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
Gasoline quality standards Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide. The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.
514
6-1. Specifications
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If 6 this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
515
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged. Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction and the emission control system to function improperly. Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
516
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
(P. 519)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(P. 518)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see "Uniform tire quality grading" that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators
(P. 401)
Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire
(P. 485)
This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A "RFT" or "DSST" mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.
Tire ply composition and materials
6
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
517
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 404)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 512)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 405)
An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
518
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
Typical tire size information Tire dimensions
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
Section width Tire height Wheel diameter
6
Vehicle specifications
519
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
520
6-1. Specifications
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
6
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Vehicle specifications
521
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Cold tire inflation pressure Maximum inflation pressure Recommended inflation pressure
Accessory weight
Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight
522
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
6
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two
523
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Weather side Bead Bead separation
Bias ply tire
Carcass Chunking Cord Cord separation Cracking
CT
Extra load tire Groove Innerliner 524
Meaning
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
inflation pressure
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
6
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
525
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Ply Ply separation Pneumatic tire
Radial ply tire Reinforced tire Section width Sidewall Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim 526
Meaning
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( least one sidewall
) on at
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of
occupants 2 through 4 5 through 10
11 through 15
16 through 20
Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2
2 in front
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second
5
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
6
2 in front, 2 in second
7
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
Vehicle specifications
527
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
Item
Smart key system (if equipped) (P. 28)
Wireless remote control (P. 40)
Function
Smart key system Operation signal (Emergency flashers) Operation signal (Buzzer) Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Operation signal (Emergency flashers) Door lock buzzer
Default setting On On On On
Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two
steps
On
60 seconds
On On
Customized setting Off Off Off Off All doors
unlocked in one step
Off
30 seconds
120 seconds
Off Off
528
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
Wireless remote control (P. 40)
Operation signal (Buzzer)
Panic function
On
Off
On
Off
Door lock (P. 44, 489)
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked in one
step
Automatic light control system (P. 170)
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed
Level 3 30 seconds
Level 1 to 5 0 second
60 seconds 90 seconds
Lights (P. 170)
Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only)
On
Off
Time elapsed before lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds 30 seconds
Operation when the doors are unlocked
On
Off
Vehicles with smart key
system: Operation after
Illumination the "ENGINE START
(P. 335)
STOP" switch is turned
OFF Vehicles without smart
On
key system: Operation
after the engine switch
is turned to the "LOCK"
position
6
Off
Front foot lights
On
Off
Vehicle specifications
529
6-2. Customization
Item
Seat belt reminder (P. 456)
Function
Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer
Default setting
Customized setting
On
Off
530
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
Item
Power window
Moon roof (if equipped) Maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
When to initialize After reconnecting or changing the battery After reconnecting or changing the battery
After the maintenance is performed
Reference P. 85 P. 89 P. 456
Vehicle specifications
6 531
6-3. Initialization 532
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
534
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte
qu'elle
couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
7
For owners
535
ATTENTION Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de sécurité du siège central de la
deuxième rangée N'utilisez pas la ceinture de sécurité du siège central de deuxième rangée si l'une des 2 boucles est déverrouillée. Si une seule des boucles est verrouillée, ceci peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de freinage brusque ou de collision.
Entretien et soin Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
536
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables frontaux Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle.
7
537
For owners
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux et rideau Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux Participent à la protection du thorax des occupants des sièges avant. Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis aux places extérieures.
538
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
Sacs de sécurité gonflables Voyant SRS
rideau
Sac de sécurité gonflable
Sacs de sécurité gonflables conducteur
latéraux
Capteur de la position du
Sac de sécurité gonflable siège conducteur
passager avant
Contacteur de boucle de
Capteurs de sacs de ceinture de sécurité
sécurité gonflables latéraux conducteur
et rideau
Boîtier électronique de sacs
Capteurs de sacs de de sécurité gonflables
sécurité gonflables frontaux
Système de classification
Contacteur de boucle de de l'occupant du siège
ceinture de sécurité passager avant (ECU et
passager avant Capteurs de sacs de
capteurs) Prétensionneurs
7
de
sécurité gonflables rideau
ceintures de sécurité et
Témoins "AIR BAG ON" et
limiteurs de force
"AIR BAG OFF"
539
For owners
Votre véhicule est équipé de ADVANCED AIRBAGS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc. indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des airbags est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
540
ATTENTION
Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement. Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
La zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si à présent vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
· Reculez votre siège autant que vous le permet la longueur de vos jambes (vous devez toujours atteindre confortablement les pédales).
· Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous voyez mal la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour vous surélever ou bien remontez l'assise du siège si votre véhicule est doté de ce dispositif.
· Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a 7 pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou. Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA cidessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.
541
For owners
ATTENTION
Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les airbags SRS frontaux détectent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même que ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les airbags SRS frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement en cas d'accident, et vous risquez d'être tué ou grièvement blessé. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager au maximum du sac de sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte telle sorte que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans son siège.
Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité dans un siège de sécurité enfant. Toyota recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. C'est à l'arrière que les nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés.
N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin "AIR BAG OFF" est allumé. En cas d'accident, la vitesse et la violence de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable du passager avant peut tuer ou blesser grièvement l'enfant si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège avant.
542
ATTENTION Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.
Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.
Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec quelque chose sur les genoux, et n'autorisez pas non plus le passager à voyager avec quelque chose sur les genoux.
Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur le siège passager et se pencher vers la porte ou bien mettre sa tête ou ses mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
7
543
For owners
ATTENTION
Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la planche de bord ou la garniture centrale du volant de direction. Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS conducteur et passager avant, tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile.
Ne fixez aucun objet sur les portes, la vitre de pare-brise, les vitres latérales, les montants avant et arrière ou la garniture de rail latéral de toit.
Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet dur. En cas de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable SRS rideau, ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles capables de vous blesser grièvement, voire de vous tuer.
N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le déploiement.
Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS (oP. 539). En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS.
544
ATTENTION Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils sont alors encore très chauds.
Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.
7
545
For owners
ATTENTION Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes. Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS. Réparations, modifications, dépose ou remplacement du volant, du
combiné d'instruments, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit. Réparations ou modifications de l'aile avant, du bouclier avant, ou du côté de l'habitacle. Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.). Modifications des suspensions du véhicule. Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou lecteurs CD. Aménagements apportés au véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique.
546
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 467 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 486 If the engine will not start P. 97 Engine immobilizer system P. 491 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be moved out
If the shift lever cannot be shifted P. 487 from P
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming from under the hood
P. 494 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 488 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 491 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 44 Side doors P. 48 Back door
The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand
P. 496 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light comes on
If a warning light turns on or a P. 454 warning buzzer sounds...
561
What to do if...
Warning lights
Brake system warning light or
P. 454
Charging system warn-
ing light
P. 455
Low engine oil pressure warning light P. 455
Malfunction indicator lamp or
P. 455
SRS warning light P. 455
Open door warning light P. 456
Electric power steering system warning light P. 455
Active Torque Control 4WD system warning light P. 455
Low fuel level warning
light
P. 456
Driver's seat belt reminder light P. 456
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light P. 456
Maintenance required reminder light P. 456
Low washer fluid warn-
ing light
P. 456
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light P. 456
562
What to do if...
"ABS" warning light or
P. 455
Tire pressure warning
light
P. 456
Smart key system warn-
ing light
P. 460
Cruise control indicator
light*
P. 455
Slip indicator light P. 455
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
563
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever P. 383
Fuel filler door P. 93
Hood release lever P. 383
Fuel filler door opener Tire inflation pressure
P. 93
P. 512
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill reference)
Engine oil type
15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
P. 512
P. 506
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade:
P. 506
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 (2.5 L 4-cylinder
[2AR-FE] engine) SAE 5W-30 (3.5 L V6
[2GR-FE] engine)
564